Home

PLC_3_HW_IO_Discrete..

1. At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T370 base 16 relay outputs 2 OF potential free contact Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC OvDC ABE7 R167370 16 Relay Outputs 7 Au PLC S Fise 1Amax y s y y s y ve y z se i y SS SRRSSRS SES gah SSNS SS RSS SISSA AER ASS AASA s Q2 Q4 S 6 Y Q8 a S s y y 888555 S88 SSSSSSB 88 88 S555 SSS SBISSSSe HEN ANG COX FETS LS OW TO War O O F O OG T OO ASO WOOF OW SFO WMA OLA OL TOMO TO OTO LODO LODO LOAM OO LOD 35010512 07 2011 327 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base E l TSX module outputs 1 A fast blow nee ABE 7RI6T370 315 115 ha 215 GAOS Ore hr ean RE aae E RIS a a AE e a E Goh Sei E EEEE i eS E POO OS EEN a 600 500 400 ee L O Uf o Actuator 24 240 VCA or 5 127 VDC p
2. At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T214 base 16 relay outputs 1 F potential free contact 1 fuse per channel relay not provided Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC ovDC 5 2o T a phe Fe ei Amax ABE P16T214 16 Relay Outputs 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 l 1 l 1 1 1 1 1 1 Qo at a2 a a oe a QB a ato att a12 a3 at4 ais SSSSSS SSSSSSSSSS nASSASSSHEEKQAGOFTSH oe N N N N N N N N Lani N N N N N N N co 200 215 om 35010512 07 2011 319 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base cal TSX module outputs 1 A fast blow 24 0 l vDC vDC ca ABE 7P167244 00 0 02 114 115 200 201 202 1T 2 214 215 5 6 i o gt gt H A o fi 3 4 i 7 8 74 A 2 Actuator gt l d 24 240 VCA or iy 5 127VDC gt gt Functionality per channel r F supply 7 nN 0 5 A fuse T T T T E c E E c gt
3. At a Glance This is a description of the actuator connections on e TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T212 base 16 relay outputs 1 F with distribution of the 2 polarities by 8 channel group with electromagnetic relay e TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T212 base 16 relay outputs 1 F distribution of the 2 polarities by 8 channel group relay not provided Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC OVDG po Fie iel Ama ABE7 P167T212 aia 6 Relay Outputs Ae od L B U amp 6 Ww B amp alo Gt a2 a3 ald ats RSRSRSRSSSRSRSSSHTVAESRSRSREASALS AZ ARELO oO os of ws ja 314 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base cl TSX module outputs 1 A fast blow 7 T 34 0 ABE 7R16T212 I ABE 7P16T212 voc voc a H CF a3 ald Uf 100 101 102 103 113 114 115 200 201 202 203 eee 213 214 215 5 6 H Pos v7 wi gt te 2 4 3 4 cary
4. 278 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Input function connections Module and sensor suppl i mo pply 24 0 VDC VDC ABE 7H16R30 31 100 101 b115 mM D A 1 200 201 2 Qo we C9300 C301 C9315 Channel 0 S Channel 7 Channel 15 Connecting the common for sensors e to create the shared sensor supply e position the jumper wire 1 on terminals 1 and 2 terminal blocks 200 to 215 will be at the of the supply e link terminal 4 to one of the C terminals of the 3rd level 2 terminal blocks 300 to 315 will be at the of the supply NOTE The ABE 7H16R30 R31 base can also be used for connecting actuators 35010512 07 2011 279 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 10 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12R50 Connection Base Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H12R50 Bases At a Glance This is an overview of the sensor and pre actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 base NOTE The base is manufactured with a general purpose quick blow fuse rated 6 3 A To guarantee optimum protection this fuse should be rated according to the application connection to input or output functions and
5. Module and sensor Module and actuator I l suppl supply ee pply eat eel 24 0 24 0 voc voc VDC voc ABE ABE 7H16R50 7H16R50 numos amp S S 2 Nmt gt S S L oo Oo oo o 7A ro g L oo 6 o A Per s a e 8 s js L if 4 th 7 L O F 7 o f 4 7 sensors actuators to to or ot N Or 0 wt N gt oo OO o T oo o O o oO T cc i d c Cc cc Cc Cc c fc Cc cc cc c fc Cc ae E c cf Cc oo S oO oO oO o o oO o ff E eee x eS x SS coy OO OO O O 090 0 0O O O O Connecting the common for sensors e onto terminals 1 or 2 sensors to the of the supply positive logic inputs Connecting the common for actuators e onto terminals 3 or 4 actuators to the of the supply positive logic outputs 35010512 07 2011 283 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 12 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16F43 Connection Base Actuator Connections on ABE 7H16F43 Output Base with One Fuse and One isolator per Channel
6. 424VDC OVDG ABE R168212 16 Relay Outputs PEC Tak a a Z 3 4 6 QF 38 a aio an a2 Q3 a4 aid S a Fuse _l 1Amax Ue Ue T T T T T T T 113 3 lt a jos j 14 l4 LU RSS 88 S88 SESRSESRS ES SS SENSES Z E2 i i i i Illustration Output connection functions i Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base TSX module outputs 1 A fast blow r q 24 0 Channels voc voc 8 15 ABE 7R16S212 Channels a E E chet E E eae ae wo oT 102 a i ie 2 3 4 20 mM 02 20 207 208 213 113 o14 114 a5 115 L oo 9 o gt o o if x4 o A AA A Fu Fu hal i AAAA actuators Fu Fu mM wt to S e 2 gt of ZSL Actuator 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 24 240VCAor amp amp S a a S S E e L L L a lt p L 24 127 VDC O O O O oO O O O O supply Fu Fuse rating according to the load NOTE Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit on alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 35010512 07 2011 297 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Characteristics of non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 7R16S212 At a Glance This section describes the general characteristics of base TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16S212 Ge
7. Supply for base and base and module m module outputs M outputs me eee eee oof oO BETROET T 24 0 ABE 7RI6S111 VDC VDC i We es lvoe S a s maose B8 2 L 4 gt y 7E H si o Lie LA Actuator Ph E Actuator PEE 24 240 VCAor U t 24 240 VCA or TA N gt F 24 30 VDC pia Eh actuators se VDG Ph bz actuators supply ut supply U2 N P Np wo oOo Ont N or KO o DO Oo ooo GO T cce c c ce cC ce cc c cc ce so Oo S S so lt page oy x fo f er lt O OO O OO 00 O Fu Fuse rating according to the load NOTE The bases are originally equipped with a general purpose fast blow fuse rated 1 A Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit in the case of alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 288 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Characteristics of non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 7R08S111 16S111 At a Glance This section describes the general characteristics of bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S111 16S111 General characteristics This table describes the general characteristics of bases ABE 7R08S111 16S111 Base types ABE 7R08S111 ABE 7R16S111 Channel number 8 16 Contact
8. Pre actuator A Outputs Qo 0 1 Fa 2 5 3 Q 3y 7 x 4 z 5 5 F 6 7 74 On 10 a aD 2 44 X 12 13 4 13 uv 14 14 i 5 46 15y 47 His ov gt 49 i FU2 24 VDC Pre actuator Outputs B W 16 D Yo B 3 F 21 Sa ZS O a 24 z 49 05 2 Q Bz P 29 p kd a i394 30 15 ay 17 18 ov T 19 FU2 24 VDC FU2 2 A quick blow fuse NOTE It is compulsory to connect e the 24 VDC to terminals 17 and 19 e the 0 V to terminals 18 and 20 224 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 64T2K Discrete output module 28 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 64T2K module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 64T2K module 226 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 64T2K module 227 Connecting the TSX DSY 64T2K module 229 35010512 07 2011 225 TSX DSY 64T2K Presentation of the TSX DSY 64T2K module General The TSX DSY 64T2K module The TSX DSY 64T2K module is a 64 channel connector Discrete transistor output module for direct current 226 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 64T2K Characteristics of the TSX DSY 64T2K module At a Glance This section provides a descript
9. At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on TELEFAST 2 bases Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks x ABE7 H16F43 16 Digital Outputs ACEIRO a a a eB ge age a g 1 12 13 14 45 PIC Fuse _l 2Amax i l i il l i l i i il TEJI JIJ JEJE JN JTN JE E IN J EE TE Q defuse e222 VV LLLP YP Vy TNOVTESRORSRSRSRSRSRSRSRSAH RENE AHAEAE Illustration Output connection functions Module and actuator supply Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base 2A fast blow 424 0 7 vDC VDC ovoc i ABE7H16 F43 100 10 02 n4 115 12 34 200 21 2 214 245 L E e E 5 5 E ET oa o o y AE E fb gt o 4 actuators a ie Vs Cc Cc z g z g O O O O O Functionality per channel e original fitted 0 125 A fuse e isolator cuts the and the channel signal simultaneously NOTE Terminals 200 215 are connected to the polarity of the supply 284 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 13 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16S43 Connection Base Sensor Connections on ABE 7H16S43 Output Base with One Fuse and One Isolator per Channel
10. Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the type 2 command check function block Cde x_ tctti t lt t1i totti _ l tii gt l Ctrl1 e lt t2i tt2i l ne t2i pi Ctrl2 Acq I x Aux 516 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Command counting Role This function is used to decect a th threshold in order to command a positioning action Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration Cde Command input Reset Outputs x and x Aux are setto0 Command Counting e OUPylx Up Counting input x Block s physical output x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the command counting function Phase Description 1 Counter initialized to 0 on the rising edge of the Reset input 2 On the rising edge of the Cde input the x input changes to 1 On every rising edge of the Up input the counter is increased When threshold th is reached or if input Cde changes to 0 outputs x and x Aux change to 0 input Note Input Cde does not influence the counting carried out on the rising edge of the Up 35010512 07 2011 517
11. a CO JOO INI Sl Jou foo N lo gt 1 12 lo lt o oO 35010512 07 2011 35 Discrete general implementation rules Description The following table shows the different elements for the identification of Discrete I O modules and gives an explanation for each one Marking Location Type of identification 1 On module display A marking giving the module reference number block 2 Under the module A marking indicating the module s characteristics display block 3 On the terminal block A removable label supplied with the module to be placed inside the door printed on both sides and displaying the following indications e external view door closed e the reference number of the module e the number of channels e a box for entering the module s position number address e the designation of each channel symbol e internal view door open e the wiring diagram for inputs and outputs with the number of channels and connection terminals 36 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general implementation rules Identification of Discrete I O Modules with HE10 Connectors At a Glance Discrete I O modules with HE
12. Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Address MOD_ERROR BOOL R Module error bit lr m MOD ERR EXCH_STS INT R Module exchange control word MWr m MOD O STS_IN_PROGR BOOL R Reading of status words of the module in MWr m MOD 0 0 progress EXCH_RPT INT R Exchange report word MWr m MOD 1 STS_ERR BOOL R Fault when reading module status words MWr m MOD 1 0 MOD_FLT INT R Internal error word of the module MWr m MOD 2 MOD_FAIL BOOL R Internal error module failure MWr m MOD 2 0 CH_FLT BOOL R Faulty channel s MWr m MOD 2 1 BLK BOOL R Terminal block fault MWr m MOD 2 2 CONF_FLT BOOL R Hardware or software configuration fault MWr m MOD 2 5 NO_MOD BOOL R Module missing or inoperative MWr m MOD 2 6 EXT_MOD_FLT BOOL R Internal error word of the module Fipio extension MWr m MOD 2 7 only MOD_FAIL_EXT BOOL R Internal fault module unserviceable Fipio MWr m MOD 2 8 extension only CH_FLT_EXT BOOL R Faulty channel s Fipio extension only MWr m MOD 2 9 BLK_EXT BOOL R Terminal block fault Fipio extension only MWr m MOD 2 1 0 CONF_FLT_EXT BOOL R Hardware or software configuration fault Fipio MWr m MOD 2 1 extension only 3 NO_MOD_EXT BOOL R Module missing or inoperative Fipio extension MWr m MOD 2 1 only 4 446 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Security Modules Language Objects Details At a glance Progress indicator Error Bit
13. Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC ovDC Seali j TE r T ABE7 P Relay Out tiny 1 3 5 plc S Fise 1Amax g ia 2 4 6 8 0 Q i a a al Oe ac aii 7 013 ata a1 y Oty OOS Oty Oye oy 8 Poy OS hy Sy 2220255 S228282 S830988 _ 889585 88088 SSore Aloe eS rr Le Ne AN N zZ NO NZ OS er NZ N Ww N No N NM N N O N N 331 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base TSXe module outputs 1 A fast blow i 1 24 0 we we H n ABE 7P167318 i wi 1 200 100 NC 2 203 103 3 4 207 107 5 6 211 11 7 8 l oY A gt ih ooo H 9 o o Oo ff Actuator 24 240 VCA or 5 127 VDC supply A ie As Au Channels 0 to 3 Channels 4 to 7 Channels 8 to 11 Channels 12 to 15 Functionality per channel 2 A fuse isolation of common NOTE Provide a protection fuse on the actuator supply Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit in the case of alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 332 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 32 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16F310 connection ba
14. 7 Standard i S232 w a BI O Sol me Y1 T Feedback loop avot All Pa y2 s33 Reactivation external supply rq a Tea K1 K2 S94 A2 Poe Reactivation Y3 5 esl monitoring Y4 shunt a maol Single 3 S01 External supply The 24 VDC supply is cabled between terminals A1 and A2 It must be protected by an external fuse 350 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Using ES PB and PS single double contacts The way in which the B1 terminal is wired makes it possible to choose the type of single or double ES PB e When B1 is linked to S121 the module will be wired with double contacts between terminals S121 and S232 for the positive pole and between terminals SO1and S112 for the negative pole e When B1 is linked to S232 the module will be wired with single contacts between terminals S121 and S232 for the positive pole and with a global shunt between terminals SO1and S112 for the negative pole Using ES PB and PS contacts Pressing one of the emergency stop buttons or a cut in external supply leads directly to the opening of the K1 and K2 safety output circuits After unlocking the ES PB or closing the PS of the input sequence a pulse to the activation input terminals S33 S34 will allow the closing of safety output contacts terminals 13 14 23 24 33 34 43 44 Reactivation The safety system is reactivat
15. At a Glance This is an overview of the sensor connections on TELEFAST 2 bases Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 6x fu AVC ovod ABE 7H16843 6 Digita Inputs l l HOIA PLC Fuse l2Amax_ Dots 2 TE set rhedshoguge 13 f a 15 elk a Let eat ert bk he CE E ote E Sele or elise lg Loe arb es cle aad S ge22 V VV VV a NIRS RERS RSS SQSRSSsgsgsakkTataltatarl Illustration Input function connections Module and sensor Type and rating of fuse fitted during I supply manufacture to the base 2 A quick blow 24 0 voc voc 24 VDC F T ABE 7H16 S43 100 101 102 114 115 1 2 3 4 200 01 202 214 215 L o eo ee OH OK ne ew sensors i l j eS an SAE g 2 2 2 g Z Z ra c Gc oS io od fo Rad Pa Red O O O O O Functionality per channel e 0 125 A fuse fitted during manufacture e isolator cuts the and the channel signal simultaneously NOTE Terminals 200 215 are connected to the polarity of the supply 35010512 07 2011 285 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 14 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S111 16S111 connection bases Aim of this section This section introduces the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S111 16S111 connection bases What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Actuator connections on non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 287 7RO8S111 1
16. 274 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Connections for input and output functions Module and sensor Module and pre actuator im supply m supply i Ono 1 R O 24 0 24 0 voc voc voc voc ABE ABE gt ABE 7HO8S21 7HI6S21 708821 7H16821 8 5 S Ss S S 2 A y H P D o i l eel ells s aadal 2 L N N its y N A L N YD Ut N l pre sensors actuators to to fo N o r N T T T T c c c e E Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc c E c E c oO oO oO oO oO oO oO oO x c lt x c lt Oo O O O OO O O Connecting the common for sensors e In order to create the shared sensor supply position the jumper 1 on terminals 1 and 2 terminals 200 to 215 will be on the of the supply positive logic inputs Connecting the common for actuators e In order to create the shared supply for the actuators position the jumper 2 on terminals 3 and 4 terminals 200 to 215 will be on the of the supply positive logic outputs 35010512 07 2011 275 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 8 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12S21 Connection Base Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H12S21 Base with 1 Isolator per Channel At a Glance This is an overview of the sensor and actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 base
17. a D a N UVAC 200 0 240 V FU1 ZN UVAC Kazi OO G FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse 114 35010512 07 2011 The TSX DEY 16FK Discrete input module 11 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DEY 16FK module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DEY 16FK module 116 Specific functions of Discrete modules programmable input filtering 117 Specific Functions of Discrete Modules Input Latching 118 Specific Functions of Discrete Modules Input Event Management 120 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16FK module 121 Connecting the TSX DEY 16FK module 123 35010512 07 2011 115 TSX DEY 16FK Presentation of the TSX DEY 16FK module General The TSX DEY 16FK module The TSX DEY 16FK module is a 24 VDC 16 fast connector channel Discrete input module with positive logic This module s inputs have the following specific functions e programmable filtering inputs are equipped with a filtering system which is configurable for each channel e latching allows particularly short pulses with a duration lower than the PLC cycle time to be taken into account e event inputs allows events to be taken into account and processed immediately 116 35010512 07 2011 TS
18. he outputs and actuators 2 A fast blow 24 0 voc voc ABE 750852B1 00 FAA 2 3 4 20 201 206 1 207 107 Lo o o o 5 0 o 4 o o 4 Fu actuators o T T T T ad Cc E ed Cc Cc oO oO oO oO coy R x O O O oO Fu Fuse rating according to the load NOTE Do not connect filament lamps 35010512 07 2011 307 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Characteristics of ABE 7S08S2B1 static output adaptation bases At a Glance This section describes the general characteristics of TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2B1 base General characteristics This table describes the general characteristics of ABE 7S08S2B1 base Base type ABE 7S08S2B1 Channel number 8 Output circuit characteristics Direct current load Resistive load DC12 Voltage 24 VDC Current 2 A 1 Inductive load DC13 Voltage 24 VDC Current 0 5 A 1 Filament lamp no Thresholds Voltage 19 30 VDC Leakage current at state 0 lt 0 5mA Breakdown voltage at state 1 lt 0 5V Minimum current through channel 1mA Response time State 0 to 1 0 1 ms State 1 to 0 0 02 ms Built in protection Against overloads and short circuits Yes by current limiter and measures disjunctioner Id gt 2 6 A Against inductive voltage overflow Yes by integrated breakdown diode Against polarity inversions Yes by suppressor Switching frequency on inductive loa
19. Connecting the common for sensors e onto terminals 1 or 2 sensors to the of the supply positive logic inputs Connecting the common for pre actuators e onto terminals 3 or 4 pre actuators to the of the supply positive logic outputs 35010512 07 2011 267 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 4 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12R10 12R11 Connection Bases Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H12R10 R11 Bases At a Glance This is an overview of the sensor and pre actuator connections on TELEFAST 2 bases NOTE The bases are manufactured with a general purpose quick blow fuse rated 6 3 A To guarantee optimum protection this fuse should be rated according to the application connection to input or output functions and the maximum current allowable in the base Type and rating of fuse to be fitted to the base e input functions 0 5 A quick blow e output functions 6 3 A quick blow on the ABE 7H12R e base Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC CH HO OVDG ABE 7H12R 2 Digital Inputs Outputs x rh 0123 4567 89 1011 PLC LI I oD AEH nm 8598853 BESS888S NN NN Fuse 268 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Connections for input a
20. Module with HE connector 16 channels per connector 1 TSX CDP 02 ribbon cable or TSX CDP 3 cable 262 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Dimensions and Mounting of the TELEFAST 2 Connection Bases At a Glance Here is an overview of the dimensions of different TELEFAST 2 connection products and their mounting methods Illustration The illustration below shows the dimensions in mm of the products ABE 7HeeR1e ABE 7HeeR5 ABE 7H eR2 ABE 7HeeS21 ABE 7H16R3 ABE 7S08S2B0 ABE 7ReeStee ABE 7RO8S210 I CBssssssgs1 0 LeeLee eree Kerer re Ietereere rere O00000 00000000000000 SS EE EEE ERE EE E 1 1 Dimension with additional shunt terminal block ABE 7BV20 or ABE 7BV10 The illustration below shows the dimensions in mm of the products ABE 7H16S43 ABE 7S16E2 e ABE 7S08S2B1 ABE 7S16S2Be ABE 7H16F43 ABE 7R16S21 67 58 D0G00G0000000000 oQ00000000 Q9000009 35010512 07 2011 263 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os The illustration below shows the dimensions in mm of the product ABE 7ACC02 L The illustration below shows the dimensions in mm of the products ABE 7R16T2e and ABE 7P16T2 74 65 211 o agoe 9000000000000000 oooogooooooogdooo0o0o 15 Reference measuring 211 x 88 mm product shown has removable relay
21. e Rank 1 bits are associated with the command parameters e The CMD_IN_ PROGR bit sMWr m c 0 1 indicates whether command parameters are being sent to the module channel e The CMD ERR bit sMWr m c 1 1 specifies whether the command parameters are accepted by the module channel e Rank 2 bits are associated with the adjustment parameters e The ADJ_IN_ PROGR bit SMWr m c 0 2 indicates whether the adjustment parameters are being exchanged with the module channel via WRITE PARAM READ PARAM SAVE PARAM RESTORE PARAM e The ADJ ERR bit sMWr m c 1 2 specifies whether the adjustment parameters are accepted by the module If the exchange is correctly executed the bit is set to 0 e Rank 15 bits indicate a reconfiguration on channel c of the module from the console modification of the configuration parameters cold start up of the channel e Ther mand c bits indicates the following elements e ther bit represents the rack number e The m bit represents the position of the module in the rack e The c bit represents the channel number in the module NOTE r represents the rack number m the position of the module in the rack while c represents the channel number in the module NOTE Exchange and report words also exist at module level EXCH STS SMWr m MOD and EXCH_RPT 3MWr m MOD 1 as per IODDT type T_GEN_ MOD 428 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Example Execut
22. Illustration The following diagram shows the safety modules TSX PAY 22 1 2 3 4 Elements The following table gives a description of the different elements of the safety modules Number Description 1 IP20 hard casing providing support and protection for the circuit board 2 Operating mode fault and safety system display block 3 High Density HD 44 pin Sub D connector for connecting the safety system 4 Removable screw terminal block for connecting safety outputs 346 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Catalog of safety modules Catalog The following table shows the catalog of safety modules Function Emergency stop and position switch monitoring Target applications 1 to 12 double contact PS ES PBs Relay cut off 2 safety outputs 1 to 12 double contact PS ES PBs Relay cut off 4 safety outputs Illustration Safety module Safety module Category No of outputs 2 N O immediate stop 4 N O immediate stop No of inputs 12 double or single contacts I O system connection By HD 44 pin Sub D connector By 6 pin screw terminal block Supply 24 VDC Safety system voltage 24 VDC Reactivation monitoring Yes by strap Standards EN 60204 1 EN 292 EN 418 prEN 1921 BS 2771 1 DIN VDE 0113 1 EN 954 EN 1088 EN 574 type III A NF C 79 130 NF E 09 053 Display 28 LEDs 3 Premium rang
23. 90 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A2 Characteristics of the 24 VDC negative logic TSX DEY 16A2 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the characteristics of the 24 VDC direct current negative logic TSX DEY 16A2 module Characteristics The following table shows the characteristics of the 24 VDC negative logic TSX DEY 16A2 module The TSX DEY 16A2 module 24 VDC negative logic inputs Nominal input values Voltage 24 VDC Current 16 mA output Threshold input values 1 at 1 Voltage gt Ual 14 V Current 2 6 5 mA output at 0 Voltage lt Ual 5 V Current lt 2 mA output Sensor supply including ripple 19 30 V possibly up to 34 V limited to 1 hour every 24 hours Input impedance at nominal U 1 6 kOhms Response time typical 10 ms maximum 20 ms IEC 1131 2 compliance negative logic not taken into account by the standard 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength Input ground or Input internal logic 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input Resistive Paralleling of inputs No Sensor voltage check OK gt 18V threshold Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance 20 ms lt T lt 40 ms on disappearance 5ms lt T lt 10 ms 5 V consumption typical
24. 12 5mm C3AL C3B2 C3E2 A3E5 A3F5 A3F6 A3M5 A3M6 XIX OK OK OK OK OK x 338 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Bases ABE 7ee equipped with electromagnetic relays not equipped with relays R16T21 R16T23 R16T33 R16T370 P16T21 P16T33 P16T318 P16F31 ABE 7eee continuity block 10 mm ACC20 X 7 x z i 12 5mm ACC21 X x x 1 relays can be in line 2 except on ABE 7P16T334 X compatible not compatible 35010512 07 2011 339 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Characteristics of the Removable ABR 7xxx Electromechanical Output Relays At a Glance The general characteristics of the removable ABR 7eee electromechanical output relays for TELEFAST 2 bases are described in this section General Characteristics This table shows the general characteristics of the ABR 7 e relays ABR 7eee reference 21 23 33 37 Relay width 10 mm 12 5 mm Characteristics of the contacts Composition of the contacts 1F 1 OF 2 OF Max operating voltage according to IEC 947 5 1 Alternating 250 V 264 V Direct 125 V Thermal current 4A 5A Frequency of current used 50 60 Hz Alternating current load Resistive load AC12 Voltage 230 VAC Current 1 5A 1
25. 294 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Base types ABE 7R08S210 ABE 7R16S210 Voltage assigned to insulation Coil contact 300 V Voltage assigned to shock resistance 1 2 50 Coil contact 2 5 kV Key 1 For 0 5 x 108 maneuvers 2 L R 10 ms 35010512 07 2011 295 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 16 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16S212 connection base Aim of this section This section describes the connection base TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16S212 What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Actuator connections on non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 297 7R168212 Characteristics of non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 298 7R168212 296 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Actuator connections on non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 7R16S8212 At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections for base TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16S212 16 relay outputs 1F with distribution of the polarities by 8 channel group Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks
26. 35010512 07 2011 333 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 33 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16F312 connection base Sensor connections on ABE 7P16F312 static input relay bases size 12 5 mm At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16F312 base 16 relay outputs distribution of the 2 polarities per 8 channel group relays not provided Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks ae ABET PIGF312 16 Relay Inputs Lee eae PIC Fuse Fl Amax Taos d 4 d q d g 4 F a 3 9 4 0 i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 12 13 114 15 t i at j t t j i t t ji ji l l l l Tid I I I I l i SSS SRS SSRs nun RSRSR SRS SSS SESS SES RE on w ASNE ENE SE Illustration Output connection functions Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the Supply for ABE 7 base and TSXe base 1 A fast blow I 3 module outputs 24 0 7 0 B 4 Vv B 5 NC 100 101 ona 3 on 107 NG NG ota i 7 215 NG NC 200 p 201 j 103 j
27. Current channel 0 125A Current module 3 2A Power of tungsten filament lamp Maximum 1 2W Leakage current at 0 lt 0 1 mA for U 30 V Voltage drop at 1 lt 1 5 V for I 0 1 A Load impedance minimum 220 Ohms Response time 2 1 2 ms Frequency of switching to inductive load 0 5 LI Hz Paralleling of outputs Yes maximum of 3 Compatibility with IEC 1131 2 DC inputs Yes type 1 and type 2 Built in protection against over voltage Yes by Transil diode against inversions Yes by inverted diode 3 against short circuits and overloads Yes by current limiter and electric circuit breaker 0 125 A lt Id lt 0 185 A Pre actuator voltage check threshold OK gt 18 V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance T lt 4ms on disappearance T lt 30 ms 5 V consumption typical 135 mA maximum 155 mA 24 V pre actuator consumption 4 typical 30 mA maximum 40 mA 35010512 07 2011 221 TSX DSY 32T2K Dissipated power 5 1 6 W 0 1 x Nb W Dielectric strength Output ground or Output internal logic 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of max module current Legend 1 For U 330 Vor 34 V 2 All the outputs are equipped with fast electromagn
28. Explicit exchange report EXCH_RPT The table below shows EXCH RPT MWr m c 1 report bit meanings Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number STS_ERR BOOL R Channel status word reading error 1 failure MWr m c 1 0 CMD_ERR BOOL R Error during command parameter exchange MWr m c 1 1 1 failure Standard channel faults CH_FLT The table below shows the CH_ FLT MWr m c 2 status word bit meanings The reading is performed by a READ STS IODDT_ VARI Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number TRIP BOOL R External error Tripped MWr m c 2 0 FUSE BOOL R External error Fuse MWr m c 2 1 BLK BOOL R Terminal block error MWr m c 2 2 EXT _PS FLT BOOL R External supply fault MWr m c 2 3 INTERNAL FLT BOOL R Internal error H S module MWr m c 2 4 CONF_FLT BOOL R Hardware or software configuration error MWr m c 2 5 35010512 07 2011 441 Language Objects Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number COM_FLT BOOL R Communicating with automaton fault MWr m c 2 6 SHORT_CIRCUIT BOOL R External error Short circuit on a channel MWr m c 2 8 LINE_FLT BOOL R External error Line fault MWr m c 2 9 Status word CH_CMD The table below shows the CH_CMD MWr m c 3 status word bit meanings The command is executed by a WRITE CMD IODDT VAR1 Standard symbol Type
29. Role This function allows a 2 way split to be performed Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning E Flip flop input CLK Enable input SET Outputs x x Aux set respectively to 1 0 RESET Outputs x x Aux set respectively to 0 1 This input takes priority over SET input x Flip flop s physical output x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output Illustration Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the T flip flop Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input CLK e if input E is at 1 e output x takes the opposite status to its current status e output x Aux takes the opposite value to x e if input E is at 0 outputs x and x Aux remain at that status 35010512 07 2011 497 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the T flip flop function block CLK RESET SET x Aux 498 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex Function Block 2 Threshold Counter Role This counting function is used to detect when a th1 or th2 threshold is crossed Structure The following table shows the different interfaces of the block Name Meaning E Enable input e E 0 Input Up frozen e E 1 Input
30. 1 Tabs The register tab in the foreground indicates the current mode Configuration for this example Every mode can be selected using the respective tab The Debug mode is only accessible in online mode The Settings mode is only available for the TSX DMY 28RFK see page 468 module Module zone Specifies the abbreviated heading of the module In online mode this zone includes also the three LEDs Run Err IO Channel field Is used e By clicking on the reference number to display the tabs e Description which gives the characteristics of the device e 1 0 Objects see Unity Pro Operating Modes which is used to presymbolize the input output objects e Fault which shows the device faults in online mode e To select the channel e To display the Symbol name of the channel defined by the user using the variable editor General parameters field Allows you to select the associated function and task in groups of 8 channels e Function Defines the configuration deconfiguration of the channel group selected other than groups 0 to 7 e Task Defines the task MAST FAST or AUX0 3 see page 413 in which channel default exchange objects will be exchanged The check box Supply monitoring defines the active or inactive state of the external power supply fault monitoring available only on some Discrete modules The Reactivate and Fallback mode drop down menus enable you to configure the output rese
31. 1 Open the desired module configuration screen 2 Click on the arrow of the drop down menu of the channel to be configured located in the Filter column Result The following list appears Select the desired filtering time Confirm the modification with the Edit Validate menu command 35010512 07 2011 417 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application How to modify the Fallback Mode Parameter of a Discrete Output Module At a Glance This parameter defines the Fallback mode assumed by the outputs when the controller moves to Stop after a processor error rack or inter rack cable error Possible modes are Mode Meaning Fallback Channels are set to 0 or 1 according to the defined fallback value for the corresponding 8 channel group Maintenance The outputs retain their status they had before moving to Stop Continuous This mode concerns only the TSX DMY 28RFK module Event outputs are updated by the module When this mode is selected the event function remains active NOTE The modification of this parameter is possible in online mode function available for Unity Pro versions greater than 1 0 Procedure The following table shows the procedure for defining the falloack mode assigned to a channel group Step Action 1 Open the desired module configuration screen 2 For the desired channel group click on the arrow of the Fall Back mode drop do
32. 2 L R 10 ms 35010512 07 2011 299 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 17 Connection bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7816E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2F0 E2M0 Aim of this section This section introduces the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7 S16E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2F0 E2M0 connection bases What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Sensor connections on non removable static relay input adaptation bases 301 ABE 7S16E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2F0 E2MO Characteristics of non removable static relay input adaptation bases ABE 302 7816E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2F0 E2M0 300 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Sensor connections on non removable static relay input adaptation bases ABE 7816E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2F0 E2M0 At a Glance This is an overview of the sensor connections on TELEFAST 2 bases Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks oe r h ane ABE S16E2B 6 Digital inputs isolated 24 VDC
33. Principle Diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below Fuse Sensor supply and voltage monitoring Input l 0 n Entry Module 35010512 07 2011 123 TSX DEY 16FK Module connection Sensors 10 Inputs O 1 2 3 eye Je Ig e s eke 24 VDC OIIGIGIGS oV FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors 124 35010512 07 2011 The TSX DEY 32D2K Discrete input module 12 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DEY 32D2K module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DEY 32D2K module 126 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 32D2K module 127 Connecting the TSX DEY 32D2K module 129 35010512 07 2011 125 TSX DEY 32D2K Presentation of the TSX DEY 32D2K module General The TSX DEY 32D2K module The TSX DEY 32D2K module is a 24 VDC 32 channel connector Discrete input module with positive logic 126 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 32D2K Characteristics of the TSX DEY 32D2K module At a Glance This
34. 0 0 0 0 eee eens Characteristics of non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE FROBSTAT AGSA AA ie ecco acc cartes cna Ep dia Sew AS caeve aliens wane nee Daek i TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S210 16S210 connection bases Actuator connections on non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 7R08S210 16S210 0 eee eens Characteristics of non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 7R085210 1652 10 r 2 h er ee hee oie key oe ee 261 262 263 266 266 268 268 270 270 272 272 274 274 276 276 278 278 280 280 282 282 284 284 285 285 286 287 289 291 292 294 35010512 07 2011 31 16 31 17 31 18 31 19 31 20 31 21 31 22 31 23 31 24 31 25 31 26 31 27 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16S212 connection base Actuator connections on non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 7R16S212 gt 2052 0 ote bee i oe eye eA es oe Characteristics of non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE TRIGS29 2 cays des aed ee re ew ee sd Sa ee hes Connection bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S16E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2FO E2M0 000 eee eee eee Sensor connections on non removable static relay input adaptation bases ABE 7S16E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2FO E2MO 20 00ee Characteristics of non removable static relay input adaptation bases ABE 7S16E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2FO E2MO0 00 cece eee eee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S16S2BO S2B2 connection bases
35. 42 S51 6 Pink 202 S211 40 Pink Green 52 S61 37 Brown Black 212 S221 11 Gray Pink 62 S71 8 Red 222 8231 42 Green Blue 72 S81 39 Yellow Gray 232 13 White Green 82 S91 10 Violet 33 Y2 15 White Yellow 370 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Marking Sub D DIN 47100 color Marking Sub D DIN 47100 color connector pin connector pin 92 S101 41 Yellow Pink S34 28 Gray Brown 102 S111 12 Red Blue Y1 44 White 1 112 43 Yellow Blue Y3 14 Brown Green 121 1 White 1 Legend 1 The white wire is used for both 121 and Y1 signals NOTE It is not possible to transfer the ground GND with the TSX CPP 301 cable The TSX CPP 301 cable is not supplied with the module 35010512 07 2011 371 Implementing safety modules Connection of emergency stop buttons and safety switches General points Connections for emergency stop buttons ESB or position switches PS can be wired with a single or double contact However only double contact wiring can provide category 3 or 4 levels of safety Double contacts recommended Double contact wiring of inputs is suitable for applications requiring category 3 or 4 compliant levels of safety Short circuits between channels are detected ES PB or PS short circuits are detected and pinpointed 010 011 023 022 021 020 019 018 017 016 015 014 013 012 A Sree Eee Cet ce Sa er
36. At a Glance Reminders Figure An integrated application specific interface or the addition of a module automatically enhances the language objects application used to program this interface or module These objects correspond to the input output images and software data of the module or integrated application specific interface The module inputs SI and IW are updated in the PLC memory at the start of the task the PLC being in RUN or STOP mode The outputs Q and QW are updated at the end of the task only when the PLC is in RUN mode NOTE When the task occurs in STOP mode either of the following are possible depending on the configuration selected e outputs are set to fallback position fallback mode e outputs are maintained at their last value maintain mode The following diagram shows the operating cycle of a PLC task cyclical execution y Intemal processing y Acquisition of inputs RUN STOP Yy Execution of the program Y Update of outputs 424 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Explicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application Specific Function Introduction Explicit exchanges are performed at the user program s request using these instructions e READ_STS see Unity Pro I O Management Block Library read status words e WRITE_CMD see Unity Pro I O Management Block Library write command words
37. Module connection The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Sensors Inputs ui M G 3 E HE PERELE O O e 5 R B e el a El El E l G1 48 VDC 9 lt mO FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse 86 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A2 Discrete input module Overview This chapter describes the TSX DEY 16A2 module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DEY 16A2 module 88 Characteristics of the alternating voltage TSX DEY 16A2 module 89 Characteristics of the 24 VDC negative logic TSX DEY 16A2 module 91 Connecting the alternating voltage TSX DEY 16A2 module 93 Connecting the 24 VDC negative logic TSX DEY 16A2 module 95 35010512 07 2011 87 TSX DEY 16A2 Presentation of the TSX DEY 16A2 module General The TSX DEY 16A2 module The TSX DEY 16A2 module is a 24 VAC 16 channel terminal block Discrete input module Although intended for AC use this module can also be used with direct current for negative logic applications 88 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A2 Characteristics of the alternating voltage TSX DEY 16A2 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the characteristics of the alternating voltage TSX DEY 16A2 mod
38. NOTE The base is manufactured with a general purpose quick blow fuse rated 6 3 A To guarantee optimum protection this fuse should be rated according to the application connection to input or output functions and the maximum current allowable in the base Type and rating of fuse to be fitted to the base e input functions 0 5 A quick blow e output functions 6 3A quick blow on the ABE 7H12S21 base Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 424VDC H_ OVDE ABE 7H12S2 12 Digital Inputs Outputs 6 3Amax V I cy re E re eA ro poe io o np Fuse 276 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Connections for input and output functions Module and sensor Module and pre actuator supply supply ee a sh lis Sales 24 0 24 0 voc voc voc voc ABE ABE 7H12921 7H12S21 Q p Q p Te no 2 2 m now 2 B oo o O fhm oo Me Im glals si 8 lal es S l hi J L 7 l l pre sensors actuators T T T T oO T T Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc E E Cc
39. Presentation of the TSX DSY 16S5 module 05 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 1685 module Connecting the TSX DSY 16S5 module 000000 TSX DSY 16S4 Discrete output module Presentation of the TSX DSY 1684 module Characteristics of the TSX DSY 1684 module Connecting the TSX DSY 1684 module 00005 TSX DSY 32T2K Discrete output module Presentation of the TSX DSY 32T2K module 005 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 32T2K module Connecting the TSX DSY 32T2K module 20005 TSX DSY 64T2K Discrete output module Presentation of the TSX DSY 64T2K module 005 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 64T2K module Connecting the TSX DSY 64T2K module 20005 TSX DMY 28FK Discrete mixed I O module Presentation of the TSX DMY 28FK module 005 Characteristics of the TSX DMY 28FK module 05 Connecting the TSX DMY 28FK module 20005 TSX DMY 28RFK Discrete mixed I O module Presentation of the TSX DMY 28RFK module 055 Specific functions of the TSX DMY 28RFK module reflex and timing Characteristics of the TSX DMY 28RFK module Connecting the TSX DMY 28RFK module 0005 TELEFAST
40. TSX DSY 16R5 Connecting the TSX DSY 16R5 module At a Glance The TSX DSY 16R5 module comprises 16 relay output channels for 3 A thermal current This module is equipped with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to be connected Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an output is shown below Pre actuator a spy A esse E Q 0 n Common U Module Output 35010512 07 2011 199 TSX DSY 16R5 Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Outputs Alternating voltage load Direct voltage load a 24VDC a Installation of protection at the terminals of each pre actuator compulsory 19 240 VAC or 24 VDC Precaution NOTE In the event of pre actuator supply voltage being obtained from a tri phase network which is equal to or greater than 200 VAC the pre actuators must be supplied from the same phase 200 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08S5 Discrete output module 24 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 08S5 module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 08S5 module 202 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08S5 module 203 Connecting the TSX DSY 08S5 module
41. Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of max module current Legend 1 For U lt 30 Vor 34 V 2 Allthe outputs are equipped with fast electromagnet demagnetization circuits Electromagnet discharge time lt L R 3 Fit a fuse to the 24 V pre actuator supply 4 Excluding load current 5 Nb number of outputs at 1 244 35010512 07 2011 TSX DMY 28RFK Connecting the TSX DMY 28RFK module At a Glance The TSX DMY 28RFK mixed I O module comprises 16 x 24 VDC fast input channels and 12 x 24 VDC 0 5 A output channels This module is fitted with 2 male HE10 connectors e Connector A reserved for inputs addresses 0 to 15 e Connector C reserved for outputs addresses 16 to 27 Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below z i Sensor supply and ao Hii Sensor Input l 0 15 Entry Module 35010512 07 2011 245 TSX DMY 28RFK Circuit Diagram Module connection The circuit diagram for an output is shown below Current monitoring f I I i i l Control i I l I i I Voltage Solid state monitoring switch Ii ec i a eS a i ia si cao State os ic is sneha cow os Sa ar mn Module Jr naaa ia a anaidia ooo ecco lee aaa Aaaa ia in eee eee Pre actuator FU The following
42. 1 1 W 0 35 x Nb W Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 Nb number of channels at 1 100 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A3 Connecting the TSX DEY 16A3 module At a Glance The TSX DEY 16A3 module comprises 16 x 48 VAC type 2 inputs This module is fitted with a removable connection terminal block for the connection of inputs Circuit diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below cw a a sw ee ree a a a a r Input Module 35010512 07 2011 101 TSX DEY 16A3 Module connection The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Sensors Inputs C S amp b N ale e E 5 Ex E sek is B el J es G G E FU1 UVAC UVAC 48 V O HO FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse 102 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A4 Discrete input module Overview This chapter describes the TSX DEY 16A4 module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DEY 16A4 module 104 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A4 module 105 Connecting the TSX DEY 16A4 module 107 35010512 07 2011 103 TSX DEY
43. 149 150 151 TSXDSY08T31 155 156 157 TSXDSY16R5 195 196 197 TSXDSY16S4 213 214 215 TSXDSY16S5 207 208 209 TSXDSY16T2 161 162 163 TSXDSY16T3 167 168 169 TSXDSY32T2K 219 220 221 TSXDSY64T2K 225 226 227 TSXPAY262 358 365 389 391 TSXPAY282 358 365 394 396 W wiring pecautions for safety modules 360 wiring precautions 40 wiring safety modules 367 35010512 07 2011 527 Index 528 35010512 07 2011
44. 2 Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the oscillator function block x Aux 494 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block D flip flop Role This function is used to carry out sequential logic functions such as memorization of an edge etc Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning D Flip flop input CLK Enable input SET Output x set to 1 RESET Output x set to 0 This input takes priority over SET input x Flip flop s physical output x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output Illustration p BED Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the D flip flop Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input CLK output x takes the status of input D output x Aux takes the opposite status to input D 35010512 07 2011 495 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the D flip flop function block CLK RESET SET x Aux 496 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block T flip flop
45. 35010512 07 2011 469 Installation of the discrete reflex module Description of graphic objects The following table shows the various graphic objects available depending on the welcome cell or column Object Column s Description ae 1 2 3 Empty field a 1 2 3 Horizontal link u kar 2 Vertical link 1 3 Input set to 1 1 Normally open contact 1 Normally closed contact 6 Direct coil 6 Negated coil 470 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module How to assign and then configure a reflex function At a Glance Procedure By default the output channels of a reflex module are classified as standard discrete outputs It is therefore necessary to reassign the chosen function for each channel used Configuring a reflex function involves defining its operating conditions such as e the sequential logic associated with the various inputs e the type of output chosen e the parameter setting of the block The sequential logic is created with ladder language using the language objects associated with the reflex module concerned The following table shows the various steps for configuring a reflex function block Step Action 1 Access the module configuration screen 2 Select the Config outputs tab 3 Click in the Functions cell of the channel to be assigned 4 From the drop down list
46. 35010512 07 2011 95 TSX DEY 16A2 Module connection The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Sensors Inputs Hio 2 o 1 3 H2 4 3 644 6 5 7H6 8 7 H8 10 9 ADH 12 11 32 4 13 5414 16 F 15 24VDC_FUI ov 60 FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse NOTE When the 0 V sensor is grounded it is not recommended to use the negative logic If a wire should accidentally become disconnected and come into contact with the mechanical ground this might set the input to 1 which could create an accidental command 96 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A3 Discrete input module Overview This chapter describes the TSX DEY 16A3 module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DEY 16A3 module 98 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A3 module 99 Connecting the TSX DEY 16A3 module 101 35010512 07 2011 97 TSX DEY 16A3 Presentation of the TSX DEY 16A3 module General The TSX DEY 16A3 module The TSX DEY 16A3 module is a 48 VAC 16 channel terminal block Discrete input module 98 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A3 Charact
47. 60 V ripple Current channel 1 25A Current module 7A Power of tungsten filament lamp Maximum 10 W Leakage current at 0 lt 1mA Voltage drop at 1 lt 1V Load impedance minimum 48 Ohms Response time 2 200 micros Frequency of switching to inductive load 0 5 LI2 Hz Paralleling of outputs Yes maximum of 2 Compatibility with IEC 1131 2 DC inputs Yes type 1 and type 2 Built in protection against over voltage Yes by Transil diode against inversions Yes by inverted diode 3 against short circuits and overloads Yes by current limiter and electric circuit breaker 1 5 In lt Id lt 2 In Pre actuator voltage check threshold OK gt 36V Error lt 24V Check response time on appearance T lt 4ms on disappearance T lt 30 ms 5 V consumption typical 55 mA maximum 65 mA 24 V pre actuator consumption 4 typical 30 mA maximum 50 mA 35010512 07 2011 157 TSX DSY 08T31 Dissipated power 5 2 2 W 0 55 x Nb W Dielectric strength Output ground or Output internal logic 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of max module current Legend 1 For U 330 Vor 34 V 2 All the outputs are equipped with fast electromagnet demagnetization circuits El
48. Actuator connections on ABE 7S16S2B0 S2B2 static output adaptation DASES eenieder Eka eee Ae ee ed nae dh gan ep we Se Characteristics of static output adaptation bases ABE 7S16S2B0 S2B2 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2Biconnection base Actuator connections on ABE 7S08S2B1 static output adaptation base Characteristics of ABE 7S08S2B1 static output adaptation bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2B0 connection base Actuator connections on the ABE 7S08S2B0 static output adaptation DAS Cer ay cepa S ate e E eee ask Bhs Setar E SA bea Dn oA e aaa apace tay Characteristics of the ABE 7S08S2B0 static output adaptation bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R161T210 P16T210 connection bases Actuator connections on ABE 7R161T210 P16T210 electromechanical or static output relay bases size 10 mm 0 ee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R161T212 P16T212 connection bases Actuator links on ABE 7R16T212 P16T212 electromechanical or static output relay bases size 10 mm 2 0c eee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T230 connection base Actuator connections on ABE 7R16T230 electromechanical output relay bases SiZ0e10MM 0 ect eet ae TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T231 connection base Actuator connections on ABE 7R16T231 electromechanical output relay base size 10mM 0 ete TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T214 connection base Actuator connections on ABE 7P16T214 electromechanical o
49. Cc o oO oO oO oO o oO oO of ay c c m L O O O O O O O Connecting the common for sensors e In order to create the shared sensor supply position the jumper 1 on terminals 1 and 2 terminals 200 to 215 will be on the of the supply positive logic inputs Terminals 216 217 218 and 219 are linked to the polarity Connecting the common for pre actuators e In order to create the shared supply for the pre actuators position the jumper 2 on terminals 3 and 4 terminals 200 to 215 will be on the of the supply positive logic outputs Terminals 216 217 218 and 219 are linked to the polarity 35010512 07 2011 277 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 9 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16R30 16R31 Connection Bases Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H16R30 R31 Bases At a Glance This is an overview of the sensor connections on TELEFAST 2 bases NOTE The bases are manufactured with a general purpose quick blow fuse rated 2 A To guarantee optimum protection this fuse should be rated according to the application and the maximum current allowable in the base Type and rating of fuse to be fitted to the base e input functions 0 5A quick blow Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC CH H_ OVDG ABE H16R3 16 Digital Inputs Outputs PLG 2Amax Fuse
50. How to access the Channel Diagnostics function of a discrete module At a Glance The Channel diagnostics module displays current errors where these exist classed according to their category e internal faults e channel failure e external faults e link or sensor supply fault e other faults e terminal block fault e configuration fault e communication fault A channel error appears in the Debug tab when the ees LED located in the Error column turns red Procedure The following table shows the procedure for accessing the Channel fault screen Step Action 1 Access the module s debug screen 2 For the faulty channel click on the button E an situated in the Error column Result The list of channel faults appears Internal errors ____ External errors t _ _ Other errors External supply Note Channel diagnostics information can also be accessed by program instruction READ_STS 462 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module 38 Subject of this Chapter This chapter presents the specific installation features of discrete reflex module TSX DMY 28 RFK What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 38 1 General presentation of discrete reflex module 464 38 2 Configuration of the reflex discrete module 467 38 3 Reflex function b
51. Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the command counting function block Cde Reset ve LALO LILA th x Aux 518 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Fault Signaling Role This function is used to indicate a fault with acknowledgement and clearing Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration Def Fault input Acq Acknowledgement input PRE eA Eff Clear input x Block s physical output Cr t2i Output AUK x Aux Output inactive for this block Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the Fault Signaling function Phase Description 1 If the Def status is at the high status the x output oscillates for period 2 x tti 2 On the rising edge of input Acq e ifthe fault persists the output changes to 1 e ifthe fault disappears the output oscillates for period 2 x t2i On the rising edge of the Eff input the x output changes to 0 Note Should the fault still remain the cycle begins again in phase Note Output x flashes when a fault occurs tli flashes rapidly fault pre
52. Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre actuator Cc Outputs Pre actuator A Outputs Q e 1 2ney 3 er O Craw ped O Ota a O Oh 36 ae 4 5 5 wi 37 38y LS 8 a 7 ay 7 1 24 40 e Jas Oh g 427 19 10y 42 7 D B 43y 10 F D B wy o Ld O G we 4 46y 13 14y E OIR 14 is O Comey ov i i ov y m is T O amp ru2 WL Fu2 24 VDC 24 VDC Pre actuator Outputs Pre actuator B Outputs Q48 Q16 m D Oy ie 1 ONT 49 50 O ay ig 3 Ds 51 52l 5 O ae 20 Oe pes 53 21 54 D G a 22 7 GHz X 55 23 56 9 19 at 4 se 49 at 57 8 1 42 o 6 D BARz X 59 60 27 2 O Ory Ore 4 80 2 49 63y 30 O sy ov 19
53. T D T T T c c c c E c c c c Cc Cc Cc Cc c Cc Cc c oO oO o o oO oO oO oO c lt c x c c lt lt E O O O O O oO O O O 304 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Characteristics of static output adaptation bases ABE 7S16S2B0 S2B2 At a Glance This section describes the general characteristics of bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S816S2B0 S2B2 General characteristics This table describes the general characteristics of bases ABE 7S16S2B0 S2B2 Base types ABE 7S16S2B0_ ABE 7S16S2B2 Channel number 16 Output circuit characteristics Direct current load Resistive load DC12 Voltage 24 VDC Current 0 5A Inductive load DC13 Voltage 24 VDC Current 0 25 A Filament lamp 10W Thresholds Voltage 19 30 VDC Leakage current at state 0 lt 0 3 mA Breakdown voltage at state 1 lt 0 6 V Minimum current through channel 1 mA Response time State 0 to 1 0 1 ms State 1 to 0 0 02 ms Built in protection measures Against overloads and short circuits Yes by current limiter and disjunctioner Id gt 0 75 A Against inductive voltage overflow Yes by integrated breakdown diode Against polarity inversions Yes by suppressor Switching frequency on inductive load lt 0 6 LI Error detection report Yes No Voltage assigned to insulation Input output 300 V Voltage assigned to shock resistance 1 2 50 Input output 2 5
54. TSX PAY 2 2 ABE 7CPA13 Risks exist under the following circumstances e modifications are made to the wiring diagrams either by changing connections or adding components where these are insufficiently integrated into the safety circuit e the user does not respect the requirements of safety standards in terms of commissioning operating adjusting and maintaining the machine It is imperative to maintain and check equipment on a yearly basis e the module is handled without having shut off the power supply 366 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules TELEFAST pin assignment for safety modules General The TELEFAST ABE 7CPA13 described below is of wire to wire type with no electronic components This is used solely with TSX PAY 2 2 safety modules It facilitates implementation and wiring of the safety system to a machine It transforms a Sub D connector into a terminal block connector 70mm The maximum capacity of the TELEFAST terminal block terminals is 2 2 e with termination 2 x 1 mm4 wires or 1 x 1 5 mm4 wire e without termination 1 x 2 5 mm wire The TSX CPP 02 cable The TSX CPP 02 cable is a non protected multiconductor cable made up of 32 conductors whose colors comply with EN47100 Its ends are fitted with unremovable male HD 44 pin Sub D connectors The cable is available in three lengths 1 2 or 3 m 35010512 07 2011 367 Implementing safety mod
55. Unsolicited opening of safety outputs No external supply or fuse F1 blown Read lx MOD ERR external fault Check I O LED on the module Voltage gt 19 2 VDC between terminals A1 A2 If Ix 27 0 then SC on SS ES PB or PS contact open Read Ix 0 to lx 23 Check consistency of contact status B1 disconnected Check B1 linked to e 232 for single contact e 121 for double contact Loss of relay control F2 Fuse blown Read Ix 26 Check F2 status and characteristics Start up impossible No external supply or fuse F1 blown Read Ix MOD ERR external fault Check I O LED on the module Voltage gt 19 2 VDC between terminals A1 A2 Emergency stop remains open Read Ix 0 to Ix 23 Check consistency of contact status Inconsistency between double contact inputs wires cut or faulty ES PB self check Read Ix 0 to Ix 23 Check consistency of contact status No ES PB action possible with feedback loop closed x 24 x 25 1 on PB action Check PB contacts Check Y3 Y4 shunt status Feedback loop remains open Control impossible Read Ix 25 Check auxiliary relay contacts Read Ix 26 on PB action Fuse F2 blown Check F2 status and characteristics Output supply not functioning Check reactivation wiring Automatic start up Permanent PB activation with a closed loop x 24 x 25 1 without PB action Check PB contacts 35010512 07 2011 385 Im
56. actuators Fu Fu 44 A A A A Fu oO T wo Fu o N al Fis fo oO oO fod oO oO oO Cc Cc Cc E E i E E d Cc Cc Cc E E f fo fo Actuator oo fo x lt lt lt coy lt c lt O O O O 24 240 VCA or oO oO oO 5 127 VDC supply Fu Fuse rating according to the load NOTE Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit in the case of alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 35010512 07 2011 315 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 23 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T230 connection base Actuator connections on ABE 7R16T230 electromechanical output relay bases size 10 mm At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T230 base with 1 OF electromagnetic relay potential free contact Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC OvDC pie Q Fuse Anal ABE7 R16T230 16 Relay Outputs a 6 Qo 38 4 6 6 QW a ato ati a2 as a4 a5 ee ee Ce ee E ene ele pli elas hae Geka pa OR i LL OL Le LILI LI I I mna La l LI L
57. and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved 14 35010512 07 2011 About the Book A At a Glance Document Scope This manual describes the hardware and software implementation of Discrete modules for Premium and Atrium PLCs Validity Note This documentation is valid from Unity Pro v6 0 Product Related Information A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program install alter and apply this product Follow all local and national safety codes and standards Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage User Comments We welcome your comments about this document You can reach us by e mail at techcomm schneider electric com 35010512 07 2011 15 16 35010512 07 2011 Hardware installation of the Discrete I O modules In This Chapter What s in this Part This part presents the range of Discrete I O modules on the Premium PLC This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 1 General overview of discrete I O modules 19 2 General rules for implementing Discrete I O modules 31 3 Fault processing for Discrete I O modules 55 4 TSX DEY 0
58. oD J Oe lt e Fuse 272 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Connections for input and output functions Module and sensor Module and pre actuator _ TA supply el supply 24 0 VDC VDC ABE ABE 7H12R20 21 7H12R20 21 1 2 3 p4 100 b101 29S oS 8 S RTR 4 2 L 6107 111 200 207 Le ee EE o201 a pre actuators sensors o 20 AA D2 Channel 11 eu bin Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 7 Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 7 211 Channel 11 T Connecting the common for sensors e In order to create the shared sensor supply position the jumper 1 on terminals 1 and 2 terminals 200 to 215 will be on the of the supply positive logic inputs Terminals 216 217 218 and 219 are linked to the polarity Connecting the common for pre actuators e In order to create the shared supply for the pre actuators position the jumper 2 on terminals 3 and 4 terminals 200 to 215 will be on the of the supply positive logic outputs Terminals 216 217 218 and 219 a
59. outputs x and x Aux change to 0 x Aux 1h2i 1A1i Speed Note The operation defined above implies that t2i gt t1i 35010512 07 2011 511 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the speed monitoring function block E x FB An t gt tli tctli t lt t2i t gt t2i lt tij tti et at L ett t2i I x Aux 512 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Type 1 command check Role This function is used to command an action and to check whether it has been carried out after time period ti Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration Cde Command input Outnut Ctrl Control input pment Corie ay Acq Acknowledgement of fault Kk ii x Block s physical output Ot Ouipul x Aux x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the type 1 command check function Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input Cde time out ti is launched input x changes to 1 2 When time out ti is over e if the Ctrl signal changes to status 1 during the time out interval the x Aux output stays at 0 normal situation e if the Ctrl
60. 0 1 to 7 5 ms NOTE Parameters in bold correspond to the parameters configured by default 35010512 07 2011 409 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application Discrete Output Parameters for 8 Channel Modules in Rack At a Glance Parameters The Discrete 8 channel output module includes parameters by channel or for the group of channels The following table displays the parameters available for each 8 channels of the Discrete output module AUXi Maintenance 8 channel group Channel by channel Reference module Associated Reactivation Fallback On Power Fallback task mode supply fault value TSX DSY 08R4D Mast Fast Programmed Automatic Fallback 0 1 AUXi Maintenance TSX DSY 08R5A Mast Fast Programmed Automatic Fallback 0 1 AUXi Maintenance TSX DSY 08S5 Mast Fast Programmed Automatic Fallback 0 1 AUXi Maintenance TSX DSY 08T2 Mast Fast Programmed Automatic Fallback Active Inactive 0 1 AUXi Maintenance TSX DSY 08T22 Mast Fast Programmed Automatic Fallback Active Inactive 0 1 AUXi Maintenance TSX DSY 08T31 Mast Fast Programmed Automatic Fallback Active Inactive 0 1 AUXi Maintenance TSX DSY 08R5 Mast Fast Fallback 0 1 NOTE The parameters in bold correspond to the parameters configured by default 410 35010512 07 2011 Configuration of the Dis
61. 000 0 cece eee eee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16F310 connection base 55 Sensor connections on ABE 7P16F310 static input relay base width 12 5 MIM ereagan coe eae alee ats path Ae Ate thant es Acre TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16F312 connection base 2055 Sensor connections on ABE 7P16F312 static input relay bases size 12 5 Me eg sce sete dee riod ire a tare os ei ee ET ee a TELEFAST 2 Connection Base Accessories 0 0000 ears TELEFAST 2 Connection Base Accessories Catalog Association Table for the Relays on ABE 7R16Txxx ABE 7P16Txxx and ABE 7P16FXxx Bases 5 e seg oe pan Pe oa hess hie diate ay Characteristics of the Removable ABR 7xxx Electromechanical Output Relay Sees te nas ha ate 2 ele ede eee g aed ahentes Mea da ke nae Characteristics of the Removable ABS 7Exx Static input Relays Characteristics of the Removable ABS 7Sxx Static Output Relays Implementation of safety modules 05 General presentation of the safety modules 0 005 General description of safety modules 000 cee eee Physical description of the safety modules 000 Catalog of safety modules 00 cece eee eae Safety functions csi kes aaa a ia aeodieid ah nat ae a aes Product user functions eses ees n 000 eee eee eee Operating mode S ino a HP ahy aAa ete a QU ac Pa ea a aada Functional diagrams 0 cee ett General rules for the installation
62. 07 2011 TSX DEY 08D2 Connecting the TSX DEY 08D2 module At a Glance The TSX DEY 08D2 module comprises 8 x 24 VDC inputs with type 2 positive logic S This module is fitted with a removable connection terminal block for the connection of inputs Principle Diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below Sensor supply and Fuse voltage monitoring Sensor Input I 0 n Entry Fito SRE ZE CERT EEE Module 35010512 07 2011 71 TSX DEY 08D2 Module connection The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Sensors Inputs 10 G i gt 2 a o k 9000 29 OO FU1 oV 24 VDC FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse 72 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16D2 Discrete input module Overview This chapter describes the TSX DEY 16D2 module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DEY 16D2 module 74 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16D2 module 75 Temperature downgrading for the Discrete I O modules 77 Connecting the TSX DEY 16D2 module 79 35010512 07 2011 73 TSX DEY 16D2 Presentation of the TSX DEY 16D2 module General The
63. 1 78 x 108 Qm for copper l Cable length in m 2 S Cross section in m 35010512 07 2011 363 Implementing safety modules It is possible to wire the system so as to allow a greater distance between the ES PBs or PSs and the module Standard wiring 0121 0122 131 0132 141 0142 151 0152 161 Optimized length wiring 0121 0122 131 0132 141 0142 151 0152 161 Length to be taken into account for calculation of the resistance 364 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules 32 5 Connection and wiring examples Overview The following section describes how safety modules are connected to the TELEFAST 2 pre formed cabling accessory using the TSX CPP 301 cable and provides examples of wiring What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page The safety system 366 TELEFAST pin assignment for safety modules 367 The TSX CPP 301 cable 370 Connection of emergency stop buttons and safety switches 372 Feedback loop connection 375 Reactivation connection 376 Safety outputs 377 Modules in series 378 35010512 07 2011 365 Implementing safety modules The safety system General Either of the following may be used for cabling e the TSX CPP 02 cable with the TELEFAST ABE 7CPA13 connector e the TSX CPP 301 cable with loose thread ends TSX CPP 02 TSX CPP 301
64. 16 isolated channels ABE 7See 16E2B1 16E2E1 16E2E0 16E2F0 16E2M0 reference Base types Bases for connection and adaptation interfaces for inputs with 16 isolated channels Illustration TELEFAST 2 base Description 16 x 24 VDC 16 x 48 VDC 16 x 48 VAC 16x 110 120 VAC 16 x 220 240 VAC inputs inputs inputs inputs inputs The table below shows the catalog of bases for connection and adaptation interfaces for static outputs with 8 and 16 channels ABE 7See 08S2B0 08S2B1 16S2B0 16S2B2 reference Base types Bases for connection and adaptation interfaces for static outputs with 8 and 16 channels Sub groups 8 channel bases 16 channel bases Illustration TELEFAST 2 base TELEFAST 2 base Description 8 static 24 VDC 0 5A outputs 8 static 24 VDC 2A 16 static 24 VDC 16 static 24 VDC with error detection transfer to outputs with error 0 5A outputs with 0 5A outputs PLC detection transfer to error detection without error PLC transfer to PLC detection transfer to PLC 35010512 07 2011 255 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os The table below shows the catalog of bases for connection and adaptation interfaces for relay outputs with 8 and 16 channels ABE 7Ree 08S111 08S210 16S111 168210 168212 reference Base types Bases for connection and adaptation interfaces for relay outputs with 8 and 16 channels Sub groups 8 channel bases 16 channel bases Illustration TE
65. 16A4 Presentation of the TSX DEY 16A4 module General The TSX DEY 16A4 module The TSX DEY 16A4 module is a 100 120 VAC 16 channel terminal block Discrete input module 104 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A4 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A4 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A4 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A4 module The TSX DEY 16A4 module 100 120 VAC alternating voltage inputs Nominal input values Voltage 100 120 VAC Current 12mA Frequency 50 60 Hz Threshold input values at 1 Voltage 274V Current 2 6 mA for U 74 V at 0 Voltage 20 V Current lt 4 mA Frequency 47 63 HZ Sensor supply 85 132 V Peak current at activation 160 mA at nominal U Input impedance at nominal U 9 2 kOhms Response time Activation 10 ms Deactivation 20 ms IEC 1131 2 compliance type 2 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength Input ground or Input 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min internal logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input Capacitive Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 82 V Error lt 40 V Check response time on appearance 20 ms lt T lt 50 ms on disappearance 5ms lt T lt 15ms
66. 2 A 3A 2 5A Inductive load AC15 Voltage 230 VAC Current 0 9 A 0 7 A 17A 1 3A Direct current load Resistive load DC12_ Voltage 24 VDC Current 1 5A 1 2A 3A 2 5A Inductive load DC13 Voltage 24 VDC LRO mS Current osa loassa isa NA Minimum switching Current 10 mA 100 mA Voltage 5V Response time State 0 to 1 10 ms 13 ms 15 ms State 1 to 0 5 ms 13 ms 20 ms Maximum speed of function loading 0 5 Hz Voltage assigned insulation Coil contact 300 V Voltage assigned shock resistance 1 2 50 Coil contact 2 5 kV 1 for 0 5 x 10 maneuvers 340 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Characteristics of the Removable ABS 7Exx Static input Relays At a Glance The general characteristics of the removable ABS 7Eee static input relays for TELEFAST 2 bases are described in this section General Characteristics This table shows the general characteristics of the ABS 7Eee relays ABS 7Eee reference C3AL C3B2 C3E2 A3E5 A3F5 A3M5 Relay width 12 5 mm Command characteristics Assigned operating Direct 5V 24V 48 V voltage Us Alternating l 48 V 110 130 V 230 240 V Max operating voltage including ripple 6 V 30 V 60 V 53 V 143 V 264 V Max current at Us 13 6 mA 15 mA 12 mA 8 3 mA 8 mA State 1 guaranteed Voltage 3 75 V 11V 30 V 32 V 79V 164 V Current 4 5 MA 6 mA 5 mA 4 5 mA State 0 guaranteed Voltage 2V 5V 10 V 30 V 40 V
67. 2 Connection Interface Links for the Discrete VO Modules cian ieee i eee ee Introduction to the TELEFAST 2 Connection Interfaces for Discrete I O General Overview of TELEFAST 2 Connection Interfaces for Discrete I O MOdUuIeS gists ire het reich sink ee ee ate eet aa Lopes ale dee Pion TELEFAST 2 Connection Bases Catalog 000 eee uee Combination of Premium I O modules and TELEFAST 2 connection 195 196 197 199 201 202 203 204 207 208 209 210 213 214 215 216 219 220 221 223 225 226 227 229 231 232 233 236 239 240 241 242 245 249 251 252 253 259 35010512 07 2011 31 2 31 3 31 4 31 5 31 6 31 7 31 8 31 9 31 10 31 11 31 12 31 13 31 14 31 15 Connection Principles for the TELEFAST 2 Interfaces for Discrete I O Connecting a Discrete I O module to a TELEFAST 2 base interface Dimensions and Mounting of the TELEFAST 2 Connection Bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H08R10 08R11 and ABE 7H16R10 16R11 Gontiection Basesic o 4 siete he Sie be Pee Fe BAe ee ee ee Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H08R10 R11 and ABE 7H16R10 R11 Bases 0 eens TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12R10 12R11 Connection Bases Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H12R10 R11 Bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H08R21 and ABE 7H16R20 16R21 16R23 Connection BaS S 6 eee tenes Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H08R21 and ABE 7H16R20
68. 2011 261 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Connecting a Discrete I O module to a TELEFAST 2 base interface At a Glance The connection of a Discrete I O module with a HE10 connector to the TELEFAST 2 connection base is performed by way of a multi strand sheathed ribbon cable or connection cable see page 48 Illustration The following diagram shows the connection of a Discrete I O module with a HE10 connector to a TELEFAST 2 connection base eH JOOOO ia QOGGOOVOOOHODOOGO9NOD Cr LPCOO DOOD OOO OO 000000 o O000000000000009 O00000 NE a 7 3 H ooo cloooooeodeoocooe Module with HE connector A 0900000000000000000 E L 16 channels per connector O00000000000000Q 1 TSX CDP 02 ribbon cable or TSX CDP 3 cable Illustration The following diagram shows an example specific to the connection of 16 channels in 2 x 8 channel groups via the ABE 7ACC02 adapter base joo 00 QOELLA 00000000000 0000000 9990 00000000 AODOOS6009080 o 10000000
69. 2011 141 TSX DEY 64D2K Module connection The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Sensors c Inputs Sensors T Inputs O Ok bay Of H 5 sej 5 4 OO a LOMO Same Ke a OH a o 43 Ki O 7 145 His 13 aos ote 24 VDC DD 24 VDC DO jp 19 be 9 o ov ov Sensors D Inputs Sensors B Inputs o o O O 5 s o is O 53 0 Oo 21 o coi O Ot ea ORE ho S 5 60 l5 28 a is a6 2 ig K aH 24 VDC of 24 VDC DO jy H 69 re si L ov E oV FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse 142 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08T2 output module 15 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 08T2 module its characteristics and its conn
70. 204 35010512 07 2011 201 TSX DSY 08S5 Presentation of the TSX DSY 08S5 module General The TSX DSY 08S5 module The TSX DSY 08S5 module is a 8 channel terminal block Discrete bidirectional triode thyristor output module This module features protection of contacts by interchangeable fuses see page 183 202 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08S5 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08S5 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08S5 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08S5 module The TSX DSY 08S5 module Bidirectional triode thyristor outputs Threshold service voltage Direct prohibited Alternating 41 264 V Admissible current channel 2A see page 77 module 12A Leakage current 2mA Response time Activation lt 10 ms Deactivation lt 10 ms Built in protection against over voltage R C and Ge Mov circuit against short circuits and overloads interchangeable quick blow fuse per common 5 A Dissipated power 0 5 W 1 W per A and per output Dielectric strength Output ground or Output internal logic 2000 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC 5 V supply consumption Typical 125 mA Maximum 135 mA 35010512 07 2011 203 TS
71. 3 x 10 maneuvers 10 5 x 10 maneuvers 11 10 x 10 maneuvers 12 Nb number of outputs at 1 13 Per channel at 1 35010512 07 2011 177 TSX DSY 08R5 Connecting the TSX DSY 08R5 module At a Glance The TSX DSY 08R5 module comprises 8 relay output channels for 3 A thermal current This module is equipped with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to be connected Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an output is shown below Pre actuator sa Sa cS me ct mers any a Q 0 n Common U Module Output 178 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08R5 Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Outputs Alternating voltage load Direct voltage load AD 24VDC a Installation of protection at the terminals of each pre actuator compulsory 19 240 VAC Aaf 24 VDC 35010512 07 2011 179 TSX DSY 08R5 180 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08R4D Discrete output module 21 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 08R4D module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 08R4D module 182 Fuse protection 183 Connecting the TSX DSY 08R4
72. 32 safety modules in series 378 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules 32 6 Maintenance and diagnostics Overview The following chapter describes the faults which may occur during operation of TSX PAY 2 2 modules What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Fault detection 380 Displaying safety module faults 382 Diagnostics of safety modules 383 Maintenance table 385 Test procedure 387 35010512 07 2011 379 Implementing safety modules Fault detection Introduction On inputs On outputs This section describes the faults that can be detected by the safety modules The module is able to detect a short circuit between the two channels ES PB and PS in which case the bit Ix 27 signals a fault in the safety system The module also self checks inputs where used with double contacts if the states of the ES PBs or PSs are inconsistent when they are activated the safety outputs are opened but reactivation is no longer possible In order to store a fault in the memory it is imperative to e maintain a permanent supply e activate only one ES PB ata time ES short circuit detection Application solutions which use an API output in the feedback loop and which are able to detect faults thanks to module diagnostics data make it possible to improve the conditions under which faults are stored In order to detect output fault
73. 5 V consumption typical 80 mA maximum 90 mA 35010512 07 2011 105 TSX DEY 16A4 Sensor supply consumption 1 typical 15 mA 15 x Nb mA maximum 19 mA 15 x Nb mA Dissipated power 1 1 W 0 35 x Nb W Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 Nb number of channels at 1 106 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A4 Connecting the TSX DEY 16A4 module At a Glance The TSX DEY 16A4 module comprises 16 x 120 VAC type 2 inputs This module is fitted with a removable connection terminal block for the connection of inputs Circuit diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below upply alvanic monitoring insulation Input Module 35010512 07 2011 107 TSX DEY 16A4 Module connection The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Sensors Inputs C 5 amp b N ale e E 5 Ex E sek is B el J E A G UVAC 100 120 V FU1 UVAC ane HO FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse 108 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A5 Discrete input module 10 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DEY 16A5 module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors What s in this Chapt
74. 9 ov y 19 0 19 Fu2 Fu2 P 24 VDC 24 VDC FU2 2 A quick blow fuse NOTE It is compulsory to connect e the 24 VDC to terminals 17 and 19 e the 0 V to terminals 18 and 20 230 35010512 07 2011 TSX DMY 28FK Discrete mixed I O module 29 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DMY 28FK module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors and pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DMY 28FK module 232 Characteristics of the TSX DMY 28FK module 233 Connecting the TSX DMY 28FK module 236 35010512 07 2011 231 TSX DMY 28FK Presentation of the TSX DMY 28FK module General The TSX DMY 28FK module The TSX DMY 28FK is a Discrete mixed I O module with both 16 x 24 VDC fast input connector channels and 12 x 24 VDC transistor output channels This module s inputs have the following specific functions e programmable filtering inputs are equipped with a filtering system which is programmable for each channel see page 117 e latching allows particularly short pulses with a duration lower than the PLC cycle time see page 118 to be taken into account e event inputs allows events to be taken into account and processed immediately see page 120 232 35010512 07 2011 TSX DMY 28FK Characteristics of the TSX DMY 28FK modul
75. BLK BOOL R Terminal block error MWr m c 2 2 EXT PS FLT BOOL R External supply fault MWr m c 2 3 INTERNAL FLT BOOL R Internal error H S module MWr m c 2 4 CONF_FLT BOOL R Hardware or software configuration error MWr m c 2 5 434 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number COM_FLT BOOL R Problem communicating with the PLC MWr m c 2 6 SHORT_CIRCUIT BOOL R External error Short circuit on a channel MWr m c 2 8 LINE_FLT BOOL R External error Line fault MWr m c 2 9 Status word CH_CMD The table below shows the CH_ CMD MWr m c 3 status word bit meanings The command is executed by aWRITE CMD IODDT_ VAR1 Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number PS_CTRL_DIS BOOL R W Disable control of the external supply MWr m c 3 1 PS_CTRL_EN BOOL R W Enable control of the external supply MWr m c 3 2 35010512 07 2011 435 Language Objects Details about T_DIS_EVT Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange At a Glance Input flag The following tables show IODDT of type T_DIS _ 1 that apply to Discrete event input modules The following table presents the VALUE lr m c bit meaning EVT implicit exchanges objects Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number VALUE EBOOL R Indicates that the output of the sensor controlling lr m c the input is activa
76. Connecting the TSX DSY 16R5 module 199 35010512 07 2011 195 TSX DSY 16R5 Presentation of the TSX DSY 16R5 module General The TSX DSY 16R5 module The TSX DSY 16R5 module is a 16 channel terminal block Discrete relay output module for 3 A thermal current The outputs of this module do not feature any contact protection additional precautions see page 175 must therefore be taken 196 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 16R5 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16R5 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 16R5 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 16R5 module The TSX DSY 16R5 module 3 A thermal current relay outputs Threshold service voltage Direct 10 34 VDC see page 77 Alternating 19 264 VAC Thermal current 3A Maximum current per common 3 A value not to be exceeded Alternating current load Resistive Voltage 24V 48 V 100 120V 200 240 V pole Power 50VA 5 50VA 6 110VA 6 220 VA 6 110 VA 4 220 VA 4 Inductive Voltage 24V 48 V 100 120V 200 240 V poe Power 24VA 4 10VA 10 10VA 11 10 VA 11 ID 24VA 8 50VA 7 50VA 9 110 VA 2 110 VA 6 220 VA 1 Direct current load Resistive Voltage 24V DC12 Power 24 W 6 40 W 3 Inductive Voltage 24V DC13 L R Power 10 W 8 60 m
77. Discrete I O Modules to TELEFAST Interfaces Using an HE10 Connector At a Glance Connecting discrete input output modules to TELEFAST interfaces for connecting and adapting fast wiring HE10 connectors is done with the aid of e a 28 gauge multi stranded sheathed cable 0 08 mm e a 22 gauge connection cable 0 34 mm TSX CDP 102 202 302 Connection Cable The 28 gauge connection cable 0 08 mm comes in three different lengths e 3 ft 3 4 in length TSX CDP 102 e 6 ft 6 8 in length TSX CDP 202 e 9 ft 10 2 in length TSX CDP 302 This cable is made up of 2 HE10 connectors and a multi stranded sheathed ribbon cable where each wire has a cross section area of 0 08 mm2 Given the small area of each of the wires you are advised to only use it for low current inputs or outputs lt 100 mA per input or output TSX CDP 053 103 203 303 503 Connection Cable The 22 gauge connection cable 0 34 mm comes in five different lengths 1 ft 7 7 in length TSX CDP 053 3 ft 3 4 in length TSX CDP 103 6 ft 6 8 in length TSX CDP 203 9 ft 10 2 in length TSX CDP 303 16 ft 5 in length TSX CDP 503 This cable is made up of 2 sheathed HE10 connectors and a cable with a cross section of 0 34 mm which can take higher currents gt 500 mA 48 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general implementation rules Illustration The illustration below shows the two types of connection to the TELEFAST interface via multi strand cable or
78. He FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse 136 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 64D2K Discrete input module 14 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DEY 64D2K module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DEY 64D2K module 138 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 64D2K module 139 Connecting the TSX DEY 64D2K module 141 35010512 07 2011 137 TSX DEY 64D2K Presentation of the TSX DEY 64D2K module General The TSX DEY 64D2K module The TSX DEY 64D2K module is a 24 VDC 64 channel connector Discrete input module with positive logic 138 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 64D2K Characteristics of the TSX DEY 64D2K module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 64D2K module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 64D2K module The TSX DEY 64D2K module 24 VDC positive logic inputs Nominal input values Voltage 24 VDC Current 3 5 mA Threshold input values at 1 Voltage 211V Current 23 mA at 0 Voltage SV Current lt 1 5 mA Sensor supply including ripple 19 30 V possibly up to 34 V limited to 1 hour every 24 hours Input impedance at nominal U 6 3 kOhms Response time 4ms IEC 1
79. Meee ER ee el TSX PAY 262 module 0000 cece eects Presentation of the TSX PAY 262 module 20 05 Characteristics of the TSX PAY 262 module 05 TSX PAY 282 MOdUule orrea tes oo es He Me eR aS Presentation of the TSX PAY 282 module 20 05 Characteristics of the TSX PAY 282 module 000 Discrete Input Output Modules Software Implementation 00 000 e eee eee eee General Information about the Discrete Application Specific FUNCTION 6600 0 eee eee ee ke ee ees Installation Phase Overview 00 020 e eee eee Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application Configuration of a Discrete module General information Description of the Discrete Module Configuration Screen Discrete Input and Output Track Parameters 025 Discrete Input Parameters on the Rack 2 200 0005 Discrete Output Parameters for 8 Channel Modules in Rack Over 8 track modules on rack Discrete Output Parameter for Modules with more than 8 Channels on the Rack 200e0 eee eeeeees Configuration of discrete parameters 000 eee eee How to Modify the Task parameter of a Discrete module How to Modify the External Power Supply Error Monitoring Parameter of a Discrete Module 00 0 000 cee eee How to Modify the Function Parameter of a Discrete Input Module How to Modify the Filte
80. Nb mA maximum 33 mA 7 x Nb mA Dissipated power 2 1 W 0 15 x Nb W 35010512 07 2011 75 TSX DEY 16D2 Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 This characteristic is used to connect several inputs to the same module in parallel or to different modules for input redundancy 2 Nb number of channels at 1 76 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16D2 Temperature downgrading for the Discrete I O modules At a Glance All characteristics for the different Discrete modules are given for a load rate of 60 of channels simultaneously set to 1 In the event of a greater load rate refer to the following downgrading curve Temperature downgrading of the Discrete I O modules Percentage of channels at 1 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Temperature in C Relay outputs There is no temperature downgrading for relay output modules TSX DSY 08R5 08R4D 08R5A 16R5 The user must therefore check there is enough overall consumption on the 24 V supply NOTE for the outputs temperature downgrading is based on the maximum current flowing from the active outputs 35010512 07 2011 77 TSX DEY 16D2 The TSX DEY 32D3K module When the TSX DEY 32D3K module is used under extreme conditions Sensor voltage and temperature the downgrading
81. PLC Fuse _l 1Amax Ue Ue of fit fia fis Jia fis fie fiz fie paf no fit fap fay fay n5 NIT Ost I I I I I I I I F SQorr ANA NMT TFTMOMOWOORRAW WOOO KH HAD OMOFTTWOW RESRSRESHESRSRSRSRSRSRSATPAENTAEAEA i i l l l Illustration Input function connections Supply for base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base i module inputs 1 A fast blow O 1 24 0 Channels ABE 7S16E2 VDC VDC 8 15 24 VDC A Channels ae T Sooo 700 101 102 13 104 105 108 443 a 114 u5 2 3 4 200 21 202 203 204 205 208 213 S214 215 Loo 9o 0 oO Oo Oo Ee amp A 4 A AAA ll P ry BRER HH HOH sensors A A A A i l f S oO ive Direct or 2 ae SO x 9 2 alternating 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Cc Cc fa f Z fa current sensor S SG S S S s amp supply QO O oO O O O O oO O O depending on the base type Fu Fuse rating according to the load NOTE Input protection by 2 A fast blow fuse 35010512 07 2011 301 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Characteristics of non removable static relay input adaptation bases ABE 7S816E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2F0 E2M0 At a Glance General characteristics This table describes the general characteristics of bases ABE 7S16E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2F0 E2M0 This section describes the general characteristics of bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S816E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2F0 E2M0 1 2 50 shock
82. Problem communicating with the PLC MWr m c 2 6 SHORT_CIRCUIT BOOL R External error Short circuit on a channel MWr m c 2 8 LINE_FLT BOOL R External error Line fault MWr m c 2 9 Status word CH_CMD The table below shows the CH_CMD MWr m c 3 status word bit meanings The command is executed by a WRITE CMD IODDT VAR1 Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number PS_CTRL_DIS BOOL R W Inhibit control of external supply MWr m c 3 1 PS_CTRL_EN BOOL R W Validation of the external supply control MWr m c 3 2 438 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Details about T_DIS_OUT_GEN Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange At a Glance This section presents T DIS OUT_GEN type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange that applies to discrete output modules Output flag The following table presents the VALUE Qr m c bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number VALUE EBOOL R W Indicates that the c output channel is active Qr m c Error Bit The following table presents the CH_ ERROR lr m c ERR bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number CH_ERROR BOOL R Indicates that c input channel is at fault lr m c ERR 35010512 07 2011 439 Language Objects Details about T_DIS_OUT_STD Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange At a Glance This section presents T DIS OUT STD type IODDT Implicit
83. Terminal block fitted with 20 screw terminal blocks Adapter base ABE 7ACC02 Enables the connection of 16 channels in 2 x 8 channel groups Mounting kit ABE 7ACC01 Enables the bases to be mounted on monoblock mounting plates Sealed cable lead through ABE 7ACC84 Allows transit through cabinets without cutting the cables Transit through cabinet ABE 7ACC83 40 pin connectors for 8 12 channels gt M23 cylindrical connector ABE 7ACC82 40 pin connectors for 16 channels gt M23 cylindrical connector ABE 7ACC80 40 pin connectors for 32 channels gt HARTING type connector 336 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Product Illustration Description reference ABE 7ACC81 Plug in connector for ABE 7ACC80 Removable continuity module ABE 7ACC20 Width 10 mm ABE 7ACC21 Width 12 5 mm Customer identification label marking software ABE 7LOGV10 5 x 20 quick blow glass fuse ABE 7FU012 0 125 A ABE 7FU050 0 5A ABE 7FU100 1A ABE 7FU200 2A ABE 7FU630 6 3 A Adhesive marker holder AR1 SB3 For AB1 R AB1 G type markers Relays for ABE 7R16Tees ABE 7P16Teee and AB E 7P16Feee bases ABR 7Seee 1 ABE 7S3ee and ABE 7S2ee ABS 7Seee 2 Output electromechanical relay 4 Output static relay 4 ABS 7Eee 3 Input static relay 4 1 For electrical characteristics
84. The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre actuators Outputs 0 1 Qo 1 2 1 2 3 2 E Oy 4 5 4 5 6 5 6 7 6 ED Wy 8 9 8y a D 9 10 11 10 m 2 1 i2 13 12 13 14 13 4 15 14 i 6 15 17 oV D is Leo Fu2 48VDC FU2 10 A quick blow fuse 172 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08R5 Discrete output module 20 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 08R5 module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 08R5 module 174 Relay output contact protection 175 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R5 module 176 Connecting the TSX DSY 08R5 module 178 35010512 07 2011 173 TSX DSY 08R5 Presentation of the TSX DSY 08R5 module General The TSX DSY 08R5 module The TSX DSY 08R5 module is an 8 channel terminal block Discrete relay output module for 3 A thermal current 174 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08R5 Relay output contact protection At a Glance Precautions The outputs of the Discrete modules TSX DSY 08R5 and TSX DSY 16R5 do not feature any contact protection it is therefore necessary to take the following precautions These relay outputs feature no protecti
85. UMR B F Noton SS Snes 2S 35010512 07 2011 325 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base and i Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base a TSX module outputs 1 A fast blow 24 0 VDC VDC ABE 7R16T332 ABE 7P16T332 7 a i 300 7 100 303 Blig 315 y5 119 O H O G fA LY FO AO Pe 123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 oOo Oo o oao OO 3 90 a Actuator S o 24 240 VCA fu 42 413 Au o or 5 127 VDC Channels Channels Channels Channels 3 supply O0to3 4to7 8toll 12to15 a oO oO aon Ee O O NOTE Provide one protection fuse per actuator or per group if fed from the same voltage Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit in the case of alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 326 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 29 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T370 connection base Actuator connections on ABE 7R16T370 electromechanical output relay bases size 12 5 mm
86. VDC and with the characteristics described below are compatible with all type 1 positive logic 24 VDC inputs from the Premium range Voltage drop in closed state lt 7 V minimum switched current 2 5 mA residual current in open state lt 1 5 mA e 2 wire sensors and IEC 1131 2 compliant type 2 positive logic sink inputs all 2 wire proximity sensors with an operating voltage of 24 and 48 VDC and which are IEC 947 5 2 compliant are compatible with all type 2 positive logic 24 and 48 VDC inputs e 2 wire sensors and negative logic source inputs all proximity sensors or other 2 wire sensors with an operating voltage of 24 VDC direct current and with the characteristics described below are compatible with all negative logic 24 VDC inputs from the Premium range Voltage drop in closed state lt 7 V minimum switched current 2 5 mA residual current in open state lt 1 5 mA 35010512 07 2011 51 Discrete general implementation rules e Compatibility between 2 wire sensors and 24 48 100 120 200 240 VAC inputs e all IEC 947 5 2 compliant 2 wire AC proximity sensors able to withstand 100 120 VAC are compatible with all type 2 IEC 1131 2 compliant 110 120 VAC inputs e all IEC 947 5 2 compliant 2 wire AC proximity sensors and other sensors able to withstand 200 240 VAC are compatible with all type 2 IEC 1131 2 compliant 220 240 VAC inputs from the Premium range of between 220 240 VAC The f
87. are used Explicit exchange execution indicators EXCH_STS The following table shows exchange control bit meanings for channel EXCH_ STS MWr m c 0 Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number STS_IN_ PROGR BOOL R Status words reading for the channel in progress MWr m c 0 0 CMD_IN_PROGR BOOL R Command parameters exchange in progress MWr m c 0 1 Explicit exchange report EXCH_RPT The table below shows EXCH RPT MWr m c 1 report bit meanings Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number STS_ERR BOOL R Channel status word reading error 1 failure MWr m c 1 0 CMD_ERR BOOL R Error during command parameter exchange MWr m c 1 1 1 failure Standard channel faults CH_FLT The table below shows the CH_FLT MWr m c 2 status word bit meanings The reading is performed by a READ STS IODDT_ VARI Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number TRIP BOOL R External error Tripped MWr m c 2 0 FUSE BOOL R External error Fuse MWr m c 2 1 BLK BOOL R Terminal block error MWr m c 2 2 EXT _PS FLT BOOL R External supply fault MWr m c 2 3 INTERNAL FLT BOOL R Internal error H S module MWr m c 2 4 CONF_FLT BOOL R Hardware or software configuration error MWr m c 2 5 35010512 07 2011 437 Language Objects Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number COM _ FLT BOOL R
88. by channel supply fault 16 channel group TSX DEY 08D2 8 Mast Fast AUXi Active Inactive TSX DEY 16A2 16 Mast Fast AUXi Active Inactive TSX DEY 16A3 16 Mast Fast AUXi Active Inactive TSX DEY 16A4 16 Mast Fast AUXi Active Inactive TSX DEY 16A5 16 Mast Fast AUXi Active Inactive TSX DEY 16D2 16 Mast Fast AUXI Active Inactive TSX DEY 16D3 16 Mast Fast AUXi Active Inactive TSX DEY 32D2K 32 Mast Fast AUXI Active Inactive TSX DEY 32D3K 32 Mast Fast AUXI Active Inactive TSX DEY 64D2K 64 Mast Fast AUXI Active Inactive TSX DEY 16FK 16 Mast Fast AUXI Normal or 1 4 ms or 2 Active Inactive TSX DMY 28FK 16 inputs Mast Fast AUXi Normal or 1 4 ms or 2 Active Inactive TSX PAY 262 8 inputs Mast Fast AUXi Active TSX PAY 282 8 inputs Inactive 408 35010512 07 2011 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application Reference module No of inputs Associated task Function Filter On Power 8 channel group by channel by channel supply fault 16 channel group TSX DMY 28RFK 16 inputs Mast Fast AUXi 4 ms or 2 Active Inactive Legend 1 Latching of state 0 or 1 event processing if master crosses trigger in positive direction RE if master crosses trigger in negative direction FE or both at the same time 2
89. conditions defined below must be respected Temperature downgrading for the Discrete I O module TSX DEY 32D3K Percentage of channels at 1 100 80 Sensor voltage _ 48VDC oe 54VDC 60VDC 60 Temperature in C The following curves show the percentage of inputs simultaneously set to 1 depending on e service temperature e sensor supply voltage 78 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16D2 Connecting the TSX DEY 16D2 module At a Glance The TSX DEY 16D2 module comprises 16 x 24 VDC inputs with type 2 positive logic This module is fitted with a removable connection terminal block for the connection of inputs Principle Diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below Sensor supply and Fuse voltage monitoring Sensor Input l 0 n Entry bennnnn nn nn nnn nanan segonn l 35010512 07 2011 79 TSX DEY 16D2 Module connection The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Sensors Inputs 10 J 2 C Pl S D Q G gt G 9100 0 9 FU1 OV D 24 VDC FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse Ge G l 80 35010512 07 2011 TSX DE
90. e WRITE_PARAM see Unity Pro I O Management Block Library write adjustment parameters e READ_PARAM see Unity Pro I O Management Block Library read adjustment parameters e SAVE_PARAM see Unity Pro I O Management Block Library save adjustment parameters e RESTORE_PARAM see Unity Pro I O Management Block Library restore adjustment parameters These exchanges apply to a set of MW objects of the same type status commands or parameters that belong to a channel NOTE These objects can e provide information about the module for example type of channel fault e have command control of the module for example switch command e define the module s operating modes save and restore adjustment parameters in the process of application NOTE In order to avoid several simultaneous explicit exchanges for the same channel it is necessary to test the value of the word EXCH_STS SMWr m c 0 of the IODDT associated to the channel before calling any EF addressing this channel 35010512 07 2011 425 Language Objects General Principle for Using Explicit Instructions The diagram below shows the different types of explicit exchanges that can be made between the application and module application BMX P34 20x0 BMX NOE 01x0l MWr m c objects or MWr m MOD r objects 1 Status parameters w READ_STS Status parameters Command parameters WANE EMD y Comma
91. high level to guarantee the correct operation of the module s input channels When sensor voltage is less than or equal to a defined threshold the error is shown by the I O LED lighting up on front panel of the module 60 35010512 07 2011 Discrete fault processing Other Errors Description e pre actuator voltage error all 24 48 VDC transistor output modules contain a device for checking the pre actuator voltage of all module channels This device checks that pre actuator and module power supply voltages are of a sufficiently high level to guarantee the correct operation of the module s output channels This voltage must be greater than 18 V 24 VDC supply 36 V 48 VDC supply for modules with direct current transistor outputs In the event of pre actuator voltage being less than or equal to this threshold outputs are set to 0 and the error is show by the I O LED lighting up on the front panel of the module NOTE The sensor pre actuator voltage check is unique to terminal block modules In 32 or 34 channel connector modules there is one checking device per connector equivalent to one per group of 16 channels A sensor or pre actuator voltage error leads to all the inputs and outputs affected by the error i e all channels for a terminal block module and the group s of 16 channels for a 32 or 64 channel connector module to be set to faulty NOTE Relay and bidirectional triode thyristor output modules do not contain p
92. including ripple NOTE rectified power supplies with no filtering are prohibited Ni Cad battery power supplies This type of power supply can be used to power sensors and pre actuators and all associated I Os that have a normal operating voltage of 30 VDC maximum While being charged this type of battery can reach for a duration of one hour a voltage of 34 VDC For this reason all I O modules with an operating voltage of 24 VDC can withstand this voltage 34 VDC for up to one hour every 24 hours This type of operation entails the following restrictions e at 34 VDC the maximum current withstood by the outputs must under no circumstances exceed the maximum current defined for a voltage of 30 VDC e temperature downgrading imposing the following restrictions e 80 of I Os at 1 up to 30 C e 50 of I Os at 1 up to 60 C 35010512 07 2011 39 Discrete general implementation rules Precautions and General Rules for Wiring with Discrete I O Modules At a Glance Discrete I Os feature protective measures which ensure a high resistance to industrial environmental conditions Certain rules shown below must nevertheless be respected External power supplies for sensors and pre actuators Inputs External sensor and pre actuator power supplies associated with Discrete I O modules must use quick blow fuses against short circuits and overloads For HE10 connector Discrete I O modules the sensor pre actuator power supply
93. instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Fault display blocks There are several fault display blocks depending on the type of Discrete I O module Module Illustration Description 8 channel modules Fault display block These modules have e 3 RUN ERR I O module status LEDs 8channel status LEDs KE En 2 3 Es 6 58 35010512 07 2011 Discrete fault processing Module Illustration Description 16 channel modules Fault display block These modules have e 3 RUN ERR I O module status LEDs e 16 channel status LEDs 28 and 32 channel modules Fault display block These modules have e 3 RUN ERR I O module status LEDs e 32 channel status LEDs 64 channel modules These modules have 3 RUN ERR I O module status LEDs e 1x 32 LED to display channels 32 to 36 32 channel status LEDs e 1 switch to display channels 32 to 63 ce EE EE KE 2 MI EE KI 4 12 Ee E KE KI EA K NOTE On a loss of power to the sensors for TSXDEY16D2 3 TSXDEY32D2K and TSXDEY64D2K 24VDC and 48VDC input modules when the red I O error light is on the status of the input lights green is meaningless and can be different from the current status of the module inputs In general the lights status corresponds to the last valid status seen by the module before loss of power to the sensors 3501
94. is illustrated in the following circuit diagram When the input contact is open an alternating current exceeding the cable s interference capacities may generate a current in the input which might cause it to be set to 1 Diagram Module g 7 See 24 VDC l l Input l l c L o oVvDC i gt 5 t l l Output Q ROPS S Da S l V Y l N The alternating current neutral connection is directly or A indirectly linked to the ground e the line capacity values that must not be exceeded for a 240 VCA 50 Hz line coupling are given in the summary table at the end of this paragraph For a coupling with a different voltage the following formula can be applied Acceptable capacity Capacity at 240 VAC x 240 line voltage 35010512 07 2011 41 Discrete general implementation rules e for 24 to 240 VAC inputs and line coupling e inthis case when the line that controls the input is open the current passes according to the coupling capacity of the cable see circuit diagram below Diagram N L Module PON L l l WS l l Input l i e the line capacity values that must not be exceeded are given in the summary table at the end of this paragraph The following summary table shows the
95. meaning EN type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange that Standard symbol Type Access _ Meaning Number VALUE EBOOL R Indicates that the output of the sensor lr m c commanding the input is activated for c input channel Error Bit The following table describes the CH _1 ERROR lr m c ERR bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number CH_ERROR BOOL R Indicate that c input channel is at fault lr m c ERR 432 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Details about T_DIS_IN_STD Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange At a Glance This section presents T DIS _IN_STD type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange that applies to discrete input and reflex input modules Input flag The following table shows the VALUE lr m c bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number VALUE EBOOL R Indicates that the output of the sensor controlling lr m c the input is activated for the c input channel track Error Bit The following table provides the CH_ERROR lr m c ERR bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number CH_ERROR BOOL R Indicates that c input channel is at fault lr m c ERR 35010512 07 2011 433 Language Objects Details about T_DIS_IN_STD Type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange At a Glance This section describes T DIS _IN_STD type IODDT Explicit Object Exc
96. of safety modules Mounting Safety Modules 0 000 cece eee teas Identification of safety modules 00 00 eee Precautions and general rules for wiring 000 eee eae Wiring precautions 0 0 0 eee Cable dimensions and lengths 00 6 e eee eee eee Connection and wiring examples 000 cece eee eee The safety Systemi Areia Tina hena de ea en S a i Ae a aT elia E TELEFAST pin assignment for safety modules naunau aaan The TSX CPP S01 Cables t n ierit wee ala eii iat e aa iha eee na iF 325 325 327 327 329 329 331 331 333 333 334 334 335 336 338 340 341 342 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 353 355 356 358 360 361 363 365 366 367 370 35010512 07 2011 32 6 32 7 32 8 Part Il Chapter 33 Chapter 34 34 1 34 2 34 3 Connection of emergency stop buttons and safety switches Feedback loop connection 000 0c eee eee Reactivation connection 000 0200 c eee eee Safety Outputs Sask isnan a a ie a hake bw Raster he uk Modules in serieS 00 000 c eee Maintenance and diagnostics 0 e eee eee Fault detection 2423 eta oad ee eed eas he eee Displaying safety module faults 0 0 eee eee eee Diagnostics of safety modules 0 0 0 e eee eee eee Maintenance table 2 0000 cece eee eee Test procedures renr 0 eet ie ad
97. other cable Module TSX CDP cable 02 TSX CDP cable 3 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7Heeese NOTE Check the consistency between the rating of the fuse on board the TELEFAST 2 and the fuse which is to be used on the inputs outputs see Connecting modules 35010512 07 2011 49 Discrete general implementation rules Sensor Input Compatibility and Pre Actuator Output Compatibility At a Glance The following is a description of compatibility between sensors and Discrete module inputs and between pre actuators and Discrete module outputs Sensor Input Compatibility e Compatibility between 3 wire sensors and 24 and 48 VDC inputs e 3 wire sensors and IEC 1131 2 compliant type 1 and type 2 positive logic sink inputs all 3 wire PNP inductive or capacitive proximity sensors and photo electric detectors which have an operating voltage of 24 and 48 VDC are compatible with all positive logic inputs e 3 wire sensors and negative logic source inputs all NPN 3 wire inductive or capacitive proximity sensors and photo electric detectors which have an operating voltage of 24 VDC are compatible with negative logic inputs from the Premium range 50 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general implementation rules e Compatibility between 2 wire sensors and 24 VDC inputs e 2 wire sensors and IEC 1131 2 compliant type 1 positive logic sink inputs all proximity sensors or other 2 wire sensors with an operating voltage of 24
98. outlines the recommendations and general rules for wiring What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Wiring precautions 361 Cable dimensions and lengths 363 360 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Wiring precautions General The safety system must be wired in accordance with EN60204 1 This section gives a description of the rules for wiring and mechanically protecting cables The entire safety system the ES PBs or PSs TSX PAY 2 2 modules protection fuses and auxiliary relays are incorporated in housings with an IP54 minimum protection index as per EN954 1 Grounding The module has no grounding terminal on its front panel Depending on the TSX CPP 02 cable being used the 0 VDC can be grounded cf EN60204 1 directly via the TELEFAST ABE CPA13 NOTE the TSX CPP 301 cable has no ground connection Protection of safety system Errors within the safety modules can be propagated to the outside of the module particularly to the external supply in use short circuits within the module can cause a supply voltage avalanche or a supply malfunction if it is not protected For this a 1 A gL quick blow fuse is placed in the control section of the relays given that maximum consumption is 200 mA NOTE this fuse called F1 is an active element of the safety system The module also contains a current limiting device set to 750 mA in order to detect
99. pe a a o eS es 001 011 002 021 012 031 022 041 032 051 042 061 052 071 062 081 072 091 082 0101 092 0111 0102 0112 0232 0231 0222 0221 0212 0211 0202 0201 0192 0182 0191 0181 0172 0171 0162 0161 0152 0151 0142 0141 0132 0131 0122 GO 0121 63 B1 TELEFAST terminals G9 G 9 5 J 9 D Gs 3 D O G9 B 4 e 8 D 2 D D D D 62 G4 channel channel NOTE If less than 12 double contacts are being used the input terminals that are not in use must be bridged 372 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Example Contacts S7 to S11 and S19 to S23 are not in use Bridge the following terminals S71 S62 and S112 and S191 S182 to S232 G 00 gian Bose Bi Sees Bee 33 001 011 002 ON gi ae ne ae ete a ee A 02 1 lane 29 021 012 o3 R 2 oa ee ee 7 031 022 os i at a 25 041 032 dm Oe aleei OM wai aein Tae a C 051 042 channel cr anaes Re A A a E 2 061 052 I I a i Dg 07 19 071 062 l i A5 091 082 paci o9 i i l fi l J 010 13 0101 092 ae pees GNI 0111 0102 ge LP n ne 011 l i I l 9 0112 ipp A Sg 023 10 0232 BARERA ce pyon GF yh gs 021 4 0221 0212 Ue ope ee a RLS 020 16 0211 0202 I 1 l 1 019 18 0201 0192 Ci as ay ai ee GO 0182 0191 channel oi an a WO oeer Ea ae 0181 0172 i GiGseie EC gst
100. replaces 20 pin terminal blocks thus doing away with single wire connections The TELEFAST 2 system which consists of connection bases for interfaces and connection cables can only be connected to modules which are fitted with 40 pin connectors Several base types can be identified connection interface bases for 8 12 16 channel discrete inputs outputs bases for connection and adaptation interfaces for inputs with 16 isolated channels bases for connection and adaptation interfaces for static outputs with 8 and 16 channels bases for connection and adaptation interfaces relating to relay outputs with 8 and 16 channels bases for adapter splitting 16 channels into 2 x 8 channels bases for connection and adaptation interfaces relating to outputs with or without removable electromechanical or static relays with 16 channels input bases for 12 5 mm wide static relays 252 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os TELEFAST 2 Connection Bases Catalog At a Glance The catalog of TELEFAST 2 bases for discrete input output modules is shown here Catalog The table below shows the catalog of connection interface bases for 8 12 16 channel discrete I Os Reference 08R10 08S21 12R50 12R10 16R10 12821 16S43 1 ABE 7Hee 08R11 16R50 12R20 16R11 16821 16F43 2 08R21 12R21 16R20 16R21 16R23 16R30 16R31 Base types Connection interface bases for 8 12 16 channel discrete I Os Sub group
101. resistance Base types ABE ABE ABE ABE ABE 7S16E2B1 7S16E2E1 7S16E2E0 7S16E2F0 7S16E2M0 Channel number 16 Command circuit characteristics 1 Nominal values Voltage 24 VDC 48 VDC 48 VAC 110 130 VAC 230 240 VAC Current 12 mA 13 mA 12 mA 8 3 mA 8 mA Speed 50 60 Hz Input In state 1 Voltage gt 13 7 V gt 30 V gt 32 V gt 79V gt 164 V threshold Current gt 5 mA gt 6 mA gt 5 mA gt 4 5 mA In state 0 Voltage lt 5V lt 10V lt 30 V lt 40 V Current lt 2 mA lt 1 5mMA lt 2 mA Speed 47 63 Hz Sensor supply ripple 19 30 V 38 4 60 V 38 4 53 V 96 143 V 184 264 V included Compliance with IEC 1131 2 type 1 type 2 type 1 Response time State O to 1 0 05 ms 20 ms State 1 t00 0 4ms 20 ms Maximum switching speed 1000 Hz 25 Hz Voltage assigned to Input output 300 V insulation Voltage assigned to Input output 2 5 kV Key 1 Operating piece inputs 302 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 18 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S16S2BO S2B2 connection bases Aim of this section This section introduces the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S16S2B0 S2B2 connection bases What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Actuator connections on ABE 7S16S2B0 S2B2 static output adaptation bases 304 Characteristics of static output adaptation bases ABE 7S16S2B0 S2B2 305 35010512 07 2011 303 TELE
102. respectively NOTE The modules can be handled without switching off the rack supply in complete safety and with no risk of damaging or disturbing the PLC It is however imperative that the module cable be unplugged in order to deactivate the safety outputs before removing the output terminal block Illustration The following diagram shows the procedure for mounting a safety module in the rack Description The following table describes the procedure for installing a safety module in the rack Step Action 1 Position the two locating pins situated at the rear of the module lower section of the module in the centering holes located in the lower section of the rack 2 Pivot the module upwards so as to engage the rack connector Secure the module to the rack by tightening the fastening screw located on the upper part of the module 356 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules 4 WARNING UNEXPECTED SYSTEM BEHAVIOR LOOSE MODULE Do tighten the fastening module screw as mentioned in step 3 else the module may not remain in position in the rack Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 35010512 07 2011 357 Implementing safety modules Identification of safety modules Introduction The modules can be identified by the markings on the cover of the front panel and on the right hand side of
103. section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 32D2K module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 32D2K module The TSX DEY 32D2K module 24 VDC positive logic inputs Nominal input values Voltage 24 VDC Current 3 5 mA Threshold input values at 1 Voltage 211V Current 23 mA at 0 Voltage SV Current lt 1 5 mA Sensor supply including ripple 19 30 V possibly up to 34 V limited to 1 hour every 24 hours Input impedance at nominal U 6 3 kOhms Response time 4ms IEC 1131 2 compliance type 1 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength Input ground or Input 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min internal logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input current sink Paralleling of inputs No Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 18V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance 8 ms lt T lt 30 ms on disappearance ims lt T lt 3ms 5 V consumption typical 135 mA maximum 155 mA Sensor supply consumption 1 typical 30 mA 3 5 x Nb mA maximum 40 mA 3 5 x Nb mA Dissipated power 1 1 W 0 1 x Nb W 35010512 07 2011 127 TSX DEY 32D2K Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for
104. see Characteristics of the Removable ABR 7xxx Electromechanical Output Relays page 340 2 For electrical characteristics see Characteristics of the Removable ABS 7Sxx Static Output Relays page 342 3 For electrical characteristics see Characteristics of the Removable ABS 7Exx Static input Relays page 341 4 Contingency table of relays for bases see Association Table for the Relays on ABE 7R16Txxx ABE 7P16Txxx and ABE 7P16F xxx Bases page 338 35010512 07 2011 337 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Association Table for the Relays on ABE 7R16Txxx ABE 7P16Txxx and ABE 7P16Fxxx Bases At a Glance Compatibility Table The table for comparison between the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16Tees ABE 7P16Teee and ABE 7P16Fees link bases and the electromagnetic or static relays is described here The table below shows the association possibilities for the electromagnetic or static relays on the TELEFAST 2 bases Bases ABE 7ee equipped with electromagnetic relays not equipped with relays R16T21 R16T23 R16T33 R16T370 P16T21 P16T33 P16T318 P16F31 Electromagnetic relays f rom ABR 7eee output 10 mm S21 1F X 23 10F X 1 X 12 5 mm 33 10F S37 20F Static relays from ABS See output 10 mm C2E X 1 A2M X 1 x lt 12 5 mm C3BA C3E A3M x lt x Xx X lt Static relays from ABS 7Eee input
105. select the chosen function 5 Carry out the sequential logic To do this click in the chosen cell then e select a graphic object contract link input set to 1 fora contact select e the variable lxy Qxy ERR e the address i e select the coil type 6 Confirm the configuration 35010512 07 2011 471 Installation of the discrete reflex module How to set the configuration parameters of a reflex function Introduction Some reflex function blocks have internal parameters values between 0 and 65535 which they need for operation e g time thresholds These parameters can be modified e from the module adjustment screen only in local mode e by the program see page 425 Instructions The following table describes the procedure for modifying the adjustment parameters of a reflex function block Step Action 1 Access the module configuration screen 2 Select the Adjust outputs tab Result the following screen appears 16E 24VCC 12S REFLEX ao Channel 8 El Config Inputs Config Sutputs djust Outputs r Channel 16 m 4B Channel 24 Function block __Input4 _Tm1 Value _Input2 TM2Value_ lig Diret Combinational OSCILLATEUR ni o a0 1000 Direct Task Direct Direct MAST Direct Direct V Supply Monitorin
106. shows the procedure for mounting the Discrete I O modules in the rack Step Action Illustration 1 Position the locating pins situated at Step 1 and 2 the rear of the module on the lower section in the corresponding slots in the rack 2 Pivot the module towards the top of the rack so as to engage the rack connector 3 Tighten the fastening screws of the Step 3 upper section of the module so as to firmly attach the module to the rack torque setting 2 0 N m Warning If this screw is left untightened the module will not remain in position in the rack Note Assembling and disassembling modules is performed when sensor and pre actuator voltage is switched off and the terminal block is disconnected 35010512 07 2011 33 Discrete general implementation rules Fitting a screw terminal block to a Discrete I O module At a Glance All Premium Discrete I O modules with screw terminal block connection require the latter to be connected to the module Fitting operations assembly and disassembly are described in the following table Assembly Disassembly The following table shows the procedure for assembling the screw terminal block onto a Discrete I O module Step Action Illustration 1 With the module in position in the rack Step 1 and 2 place the terminal block on the module as shown opposi
107. signal is not received the x Aux output changes to 1 type A error signal e if the Ctrl signal falls back while the Cde input is at 1 the x Aux output changes to 1 type B error signal A rising edge on the Acq input with the Ctrl input at 1 causes the x Aux to be set to 0 3 On the falling edge of the Cde input the x and x Aux outputs change to 0 35010512 07 2011 513 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the type 1 command check function block Cde l I x _ teti t lt ti toti oo lt gt T ze I l ti Ctrl L Acq l l x Aux 514 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Type 2 command check Role This function is used to e command an action and check whether it has been carried out after time period tli e delete the action and check whether it has been deleted after time period t2i Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration Cde Command input Ctrl n Control n input Cmd Fommand Coniroliype2 Quipyl x Acq Acknowledgement of fault tek ai ni x Block s physical output EA D Ouputx Axl x Aux Block s internal auxiliary ou
108. supply l SR Channel 0 NOTE Provide one protection fuse per actuator or per group if fed from the same voltage Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit in the case of alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 328 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 30 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T334 connection base Actuator connections on ABE 7P16T334 electromechanical or static output relay bases size 12 5 mm At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T334 base 16 relay outputs 1 OF potential free contact relays not provided Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks mi 24VDC JOE OvDC ABE P167334 16 Relay Outputs PLC Fuse _l 1Amax a A Q2 0B Q4 05 6 a 08 7 qio al a2 3 l4 a5 2385535999838737 S888 88 S555 SSSSSSSSOE HHA ANS LL FTO LO CON CON CON CON CON MN CON ON CON CON CON ON ON M N mM N M N 35010512 07 2011 329 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Output connection functions Type and rati
109. switch from 0 to 1 e aswitchfrom1too H Illustration The following diagram shows the process of latching a state on a pulse from 0 to 1 PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC cycle cycle cycle cycle cycle n n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 PLC cycle Arrival of pulse i State j i i stored o Acquisition and ee A ZTA 118 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16FK Illustration The following diagram shows the process of latching a state on a pulse from 1 to 0 PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC cycle cycle cycle cycle cycle n n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 PLC cycle Arrival of pulse i State stored 0 Acquisition and Description The following table gives a description of the elements shown in the above diagrams Reference Description Number l Input acquisition A Processing of program S Outputs updated NOTE the time separating the arrival of two pulses at the same input must be greater than or equal to two PLC cycle times NOTE the minimum duration of a pulse must be greater than the chosen filtering time 35010512 07 2011 119 TSX DEY 16FK Specific Functions of Discrete Modules Input Event Management At a Glance Modules TSX DEY 16FK and TSX DMY 28FK can be used to configure up to 16 event inputs see page 413 These inputs allow events Evt to be taken into account and ensure that they are immediately processed by the processor uninterrupted processing Description Event processing priority is given to the
110. the different elements for the identification of TSX DEY 32D3K input modules and TSX DMY 28FK 28RFK mixed I O modules and gives an explanation for each one Marking Location Type of identification 1 On module display A marking giving the module reference number block 2 Under the module A marking indicating the module s characteristics display block 3 Under the module A marking giving the corresponding channel addresses display block input channels 0 to 15 of TSX DEY 32D3K or TSX DMY 28FK 28RFK modules I 4 Under the module A marking giving the corresponding channel addresses display block input channels 16 to 31 of the TSX DEY 32D3K module I output channels 16 to 27 of TSX DMY 28FK 28RFK modules Q 38 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general implementation rules Choice of direct current power supply for sensors and pre actuators associated with Discrete I O modules At a Glance The following is a presentation of precautions for choosing sensors and pre actuators associated with Discrete I O modules External direct current power supplies When using an external 24 VDC direct current power supply it is advised to use either e regulated power supplies e non regulated power supplies but with the following filtering e 1000 uF A with full wave single phase rectification and 500 uF A with tri phase rectification e 5 maximum peak to peak ripple e maximum voltage variation 20 to 25 of the nominal voltage
111. the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in death or serious injury This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential 35010512 07 2011 13 PLEASE NOTE A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in minor or moderate injury CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in equipment damage Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of electrical equipment and its installation
112. the modules Illustration The following diagram shows a safety module Elements The following table gives a description of the different identifying elements of the safety modules Number Description 1 Label giving the characteristics of the safety outputs on left hand side 2 Label giving the module reference number on right hand side 3 External module supply marking 4 Unmarked area for user identification 5 Front panel label for marking of safety outputs 358 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Terminal markings Safety module terminals are marked in compliance with the following standards DIN EN 50005 and DIN EN 50042 Function Terminals External module power supply A1 A2 System contact 01 S02 11 S12 S21 S22 831 832 841 842 851 852 S61 S62 S71 72 881 882 S91 S92 S101 S102 8111 8112 System contact 121 S122 131 S132 5141 S142 151 S152 8161 8162 171 S172 181 S182 8191 8192 S201 S202 S211 S212 S221 S222 8231 8232 Single and double contact selection B1 e TSX PAY 282 Reactivation 33 S34 Feedback loop Y1 Y2 Reactivation input monitoring Y3 Y4 Safety output supply e TSX PAY 262 13 14 23 24 13 23 14 13 23 24 33 43 34 33 43 44 35010512 07 2011 359 Implementing safety modules 32 4 Precautions and general rules for wiring Overview This section
113. to 12 single or double contacts Moving cover monitoring Yes de synchronization gt 400 ms Sensitive conveyor monitoring No Bi manual control No EN 954 1 category 4 External module Voltage 24 VDC ete esa ah Residual ripple 5 Voltage limit 15 20 F1 fuse external supply protection lt 1AgL according to IEC 947 5 1 Maximum consumption 200 mA Check threshold lt 19 VDC Maximum current call 0 5A 5ms safety circuit voltage 24 VDC Module protection Internal electronic fuse gt 250 mA and lt 1A Insulation Over voltage category II 2 kV pollution degree 2 PLC supply current consumed with internal 5 V supply 150 mA Power dissipated in the module lt 5W Dimensions HxWxD 150 x 36 x 120 mm Weight 0 43 kg MTBF Module 3 x 10 failures hour Relay card 0 5 x 10 failures hour Mother board 2 4 x 10 failures hour 35010512 07 2011 391 Implementing safety modules Input characteristics The following table shows the characteristics of the TSX PAY 262 module inputs No of safety channels 12 single or double ES PBs Reactivation On button Yes S33 S34 Single or double ES PB selection Yes with external shunt B1 Feedback loop Yes Y1 Y2 Reactivation input monitoring Yes with external shunt Y3 Y4 Call current 0 5A 1ms Input Ground insulation 500 V actual 50 60 Hz
114. to be indicated on the display on the front panel of the module the LED corresponding to the channel flashes the I O error LED comes on a polarity reversal a failure such as this causes the power supply to short circuit without damaging the module In order to obtain optimal protection a quick blow fuse must be installed on the power supply and upstream from the pre actuators an inductive overload each output is individually protected against inductive overloads and has a fast electro magnet demagnetization circuit using a zener diode which allows the mechanical cycle of certain fast machines to be reduced 24 and 48 VDC dc inputs are of constant current type For any input voltage in excess of 11 V for 24 VDC inputs or 20 V for 48 VDC inputs the input current remains constant This characteristic has the following advantages guaranteed minimum current in active state in accordance with IEC standards limited consumed current when input voltage increases to avoid the module overheating unnecessarily reduced consumed current to the power supply sensor supplied by the PLC power supply or a process power supply 56 35010512 07 2011 Discrete fault processing Discrete Inputs Outputs fault display At a Glance The Discrete I O modules are equipped with a display block featuring LEDs that allow the module s operating modes and any failures to be displayed Illustration The following diag
115. variables for the application specific modules Offline 1 and variables of the project Programming Project programming Offline 1 Configuration Declaration of modules Offline Module channel configuration Entry of configuration parameters Association Association of IODDTs with the modules configured variable editor Offline 1 Generation Project generation analysis and editing of links Offline Transfer Transfer project to simulator Online Simulation Program simulation without inputs outputs Online Adjustment Debugging Project debugging from debug screens animation tables Online Modifying the program and adjustment parameters Key 1 These various phases can also be performed in the other mode NOTE The simulator is only used for the discrete or analog modules 402 35010512 07 2011 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application 34 Aim of this Section This chapter describes how to configure Discrete specific application for implementation What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 34 1 Configuration of a Discrete module General information 404 34 2 Discrete Input and Output Track Parameters 407 34 3 Configuration of discrete parameters 412 35010512 07 2011 403 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application 34 1 Configuration of a Discrete module General information Description o
116. with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to be connected Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an output is shown below Current FU Monitoring Control Voltage Solid state Monitoring switch Module Output 35010512 07 2011 147 TSX DSY 08T2 Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre actuators Outputs e i K 7 8 7 8 oh ay 7 G3 ov 5 ee 24 VDC 60 FU2 6 3 A quick blow fuse 148 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08T22 Discrete output module 16 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 08T22 module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 08T22 module 150 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T22 module 151 Connecting the TSX DSY 08T22 module 153 35010512 07 2011 149 TSX DSY 08T22 Presentation of the TSX DSY 08T22 module General The TSX DSY 08T22 module The TSX DSY 08T22 module is an 8 channel terminal block Discrete transistor output module for direct current positive logic 150 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08T22 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T22 module At a Glance This section provides a descripti
117. 0 When the selected time out is over e output x of the relevant block changes to 1 e output x Aux of the relevant block changes to 0 If the high status of the E input of the first block lasts less time than the selected time out output x stays at 0 On the falling edge of input E of the first block e the time out is launched corresponding to e the block whose Direct input is at 0 e the status of the Sel input output x Aux changes to 1 Note Two blocks must not simultaneously have their Direct inputs set to 0 When the selected time out is over e output x of the relevant block changes to 1 e output x Aux of the relevant block changes to 0 If the low status of the E input of the first block lasts less time than the selected time out output x stays at 0 5 The x output changes to 0 on the falling edge of the E input Note When stringing together several blocks It is essential to change the statuses of the Sel and Direct inputs only when the status of input E of the first block is set to 0 Illustration The table below shows the tracking of the two timers penean LORY Sel Sel til Drea a a c 488 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Retriggerable monostable Role Structure Operation Illustration This function launches an action of duration ti with the possibility of extending it for an identical d
118. 0512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Cable dimensions and lengths General points The length of safety system wires can cause a drop in supply voltage related to the current circulating This voltage drop is due to sum of the currents circulating on the 0 VDC feedback path of the electrical circuit It is usual practice to double or triple the 0 VDC wires In order to ensure the correct operation of the safety system reactivation of relays and a correct reading of diagnostic information it is important that the voltage measured between terminals A1 and A2 be greater than 19 2 V Cross section of TELEFAST cables Each TELEFAST ABE 7CPA13 terminal accepts bare wires or ones fitted with terminations or spade or eye terminals The capacity of each terminal is e minimum 1 x 0 28 mm wire without termination e maximum 2 x 1 mm wires or 1 x 1 5 mm wire with termination The maximum cross section dimensions for wires on the terminal block are 1 x 2 5 mm wire without termination Calculation of cable length The resistance of each safety system channel and channel must not exceed 75 Ohms The maximum resistance of the channel between an ES PB or PS and the corresponding input of the module must be lt 6 Q Given the length and cross section of the cable its resistance can be calculated as follows i A pet S Equation parameter Parameter Meaning R Cable resistance in Ohms p Resistivity
119. 0512 07 2011 59 Discrete fault processing Discrete Inputs Outputs Fault Diagnostics At a Glance The diagnostics function detects any errors that may be in progress Three error groups can be identified e internal errors e external errors e other errors Internal Errors This category contains all internal module errors and all communication errors that prevent a Discrete module from operating correctly A communication error may be caused by a hardware error at the rack bus or a processor or extension cable error External Errors The following errors fall into this category e terminal block error all terminal block modules contain a device for checking the presence of a terminal block in the module Where a terminal block is missing or badly inserted in the module the error is detected and is alerted by the flashing of the I O LED on the front panel of the module e overload and short circuit transistor output modules contain a device for checking the load status In the event of overload or short circuit of one or several outputs the circuits of these will be tripped and the errors will be shown on the front panel of the module the LEDs corresponding to the faulty outputs will flash and the red I O LED will light up e sensor voltage error all input modules contain a device for checking sensor voltage for all module channels This device checks that sensor and module power supply voltages are of a sufficiently
120. 1 TSX DEY 32D3K Discrete input module 13 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DEY 32D3K module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DEY 32D3K module 132 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 32D3K module 133 Connecting the TSX DEY 32D3K module 135 35010512 07 2011 131 TSX DEY 32D3K Presentation of the TSX DEY 32D3K module General The TSX DEY 32D3K module The TSX DEY 32D3K module is a 48 VDC 32 channel connector Discrete input module with positive logic 132 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 32D3K Characteristics of the TSX DEY 32D3K module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 32D3K module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 32D3K module The TSX DEY 32D3K module 48 VDC positive logic inputs Nominal input values Voltage 48 VDC Current 7 mA Threshold input at 1 Voltage 230V values Current 2 6 5 mA for U 30 V at 0 Voltage lt 0 V Current 2 mA Sensor supply including ripple 38 60 V Input impedance at nominal U 6 3 kOhms Response time 4 ms IEC 1131 2 compliance type 2 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see
121. 1 min Output characteristics The following table shows the characteristics of the TSX PAY 262 module outputs Potential reference No potential Number and type of circuits 2 x normally open with independent supply DIN EN 60947 5 1 cut off power AC15 C300 1800 VA call 180 VA maintained Dc13 24 V 2 5 A L R 100 ms Voltage 19 250 VAC 17 127 VDC Outputs protected by fuses compliant with EN VDE 0660 section 200 and IEC 947 5 1 4AgL Maximum thermal current 2 5A Minimum current and voltage 30 mA and 24 VDC ES request response time lt 10 ms Mechanical durability 10 maneuvers Electrical durability 10 maneuvers depending on power Insulation Output Weight 300 V insulation voltage compliant with VDE 0110 section 1 Test voltage 2000 V actual 50 60 Hz 1 min Safety System Ground 300 V actual NOTE the apparatus is capable of switching low loads 24 V 30 mA This is possible on condition that the contact has never previously switched heavy loads as the gold layer on the contact may have been damaged 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Operating conditions The following table shows the characteristics for using the TSX PAY 262 module Operating temperature Of the API 0 60 C Of the safety functions 1 10 60 C Humidity without condensation 5 95 Storage temperat
122. 10 connectors are identified by the markings on the lid of the front section of the module Illustration The following diagram illustrates the identification of TSX DEYe DSYee I O modules with HE10 connectors GE e gt CE 2 gt ii 3 5 H 4 6 Description The following table shows the different elements for the identification of TSX DEYee DSYee I O modules and gives an explanation for each one Marking Location Type of identification 1 On module display A marking giving the module reference number block 2 Under the module A marking indicating the module s characteristics display block 3 Under the module A marking giving the corresponding channel addresses display block e channels 0 to 15 of the module I or Q 4 Under the module A marking giving the corresponding channel addresses display block e channels 16 to 31 of the module I or Q 5 Under the module A marking giving the corresponding channel addresses display block e channels 32 to 47 of the module I or Q 6 Under the module A marking giving the corresponding channel addresses display block e channels 48 to 63 of the module I or Q 35010512 07 2011 37 Discrete general implementation rules Illustration The following diagram illustrates the identification of TSX DEY 32D3K input modules and TSX DMY 28FK 28RFK mixed I O modules with HE10 connectors 1 2 3 4 Description The following table shows
123. 12 07 2011 Language Objects Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Address ADJ_IN_PROGR BOOL R Adjust parameters MWr m c 0 2 exchange in progress RECONF_IN_PROGR BOOL R Reconfiguration of the MWr m c 0 15 module in progress NOTE If the module is not present or is disconnected explicit exchange objects MWr m c 0 0 0 but the words are refreshed Explicit Exchange Report EXCH_RPT The table below shows the report bits EXCH RPT 3MWr m c 1 READ_STS for example are not sent to the module STS_IN_ PROG the channel 1 failure Standard symbol Type _ Access Meaning Address STS_ERR BOOL R Error reading channel status MWr m c 1 0 words 1 failure CMD_ERR BOOL R Error during a command MWr m c 1 1 parameter exchange 1 failure ADJ_ERR BOOL R Error during an adjust MWr m c 1 2 parameter exchange 1 failure RECONF_ERR BOOL R Error during reconfiguration of MWr m c 1 15 Counting Module Use The following table describes the steps realised between a Couting Module and the system after a power on Step Action 1 Power on The system sends the configuration parameters 3 The system sends the adjust parameters by WRITE_PARAM method Note When the operation is finished the bit MWr m c 0 2 switches to 0 If in the begining of your application you use a WRITE_PARAM command you must w
124. 12 Power 50 W 4 100 W 4 220 W 2 100 W 2 200 W 2 440 W 1 Inductive Voltage 24V 48 V 100 130 V ie aa Power 20 W 5 50 W 5 110 W 3 50 W 4 100 W 4 220 W 2 Response time Activation lt 10 ms Deactivation lt 15 ms Type of contact 6 2x20 C 2x2C Built in protection against over voltage R C and Ge Mov circuit against short circuits and overloads 6 3 A interchangeable quick blow fuse per common Dissipated power 7 0 25 W 0 24 x Nb W Dielectric strength Output ground or Output internal logic 2000 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC 186 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08R4D Power supply consumption 5V Typical 55 mA Maximum 65 mA 24 V relay 8 Typical 10 mA Maximum 12 mA Legend 1 0 15 x 10 maneuvers 2 0 3 x 10 maneuvers 3 0 5 x 10 maneuvers 4 1 x 10 maneuvers 5 2 x 10 maneuvers 6 O open idle C closed operation 7 Nb number of outputs at 1 8 Per channel at 1 35010512 07 2011 187 TSX DSY 08R4D 188 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY O8R5A Discrete output module 22 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 08R5A module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following
125. 131 2 compliance type 1 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength Input ground or Input 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min internal logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input current sink Paralleling of inputs No Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 18V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance 8 ms lt T lt 30 ms on disappearance ims lt T lt 3ms 5 V consumption typical 135 mA maximum 175 mA Sensor supply consumption 1 typical 60 mA 3 5 x Nb mA maximum 80 mA 3 5 x Nb mA Dissipated power 1 1 5 W 0 1 x Nb W 35010512 07 2011 139 TSX DEY 64D2K Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 Nb number of channels at 1 140 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 64D2K Connecting the TSX DEY 64D2K module At a Glance The TSX DEY 64D2K module comprises 64 x 24 VDC type 1 inputs This module is fitted with 4 male HE10 connectors connector A for inputs 0 to 15 connector B for inputs 16 to 31 connector C for inputs 32 to 47 connector D for inputs 48 to 63 Principle Diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below Fuse Sensor supply and voltage monitoring Input l 0 n Entry 35010512 07
126. 2 e 2 Cc Cc c Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc o o o o o o o o pl xs on pl cass a a al cad F O O O O O O O O Connecting the common for sensors e In order to create the shared sensor supply position the jumper 1 on terminals 1 and 2 terminals 200 to 215 will be on the of the supply positive logic inputs Connecting the common for pre actuators e In order to create the shared supply for the pre actuators position the jumper 2 on terminals 3 and 4 terminals 200 to 215 will be on the of the supply positive logic outputs 35010512 07 2011 271 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 6 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12R20 12R21 Connection Bases Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H12R20 12R21 Bases At a Glance This is an overview of the sensor and pre actuator connections on TELEFAST 2 bases NOTE The bases are manufactured with a general purpose quick blow fuse rated 6 3 A To guarantee optimum protection this fuse should be rated according to the application connection to input or output functions and the maximum current allowable in the base Type and rating of fuse to be fitted to the base e input functions 0 5 A quick blow e output functions 6 3 A quick blow on the ABE 7H12Ree base Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC CH H OVDC ABE 7H12R2 12 Digital In 6 3Amax pel 7 f QoQ No w fon
127. 2 J 4 1 20 6 e n 108 6 8 7 nb NC RDO sensors D gt Channel 15 ChannelO Channeli Sensor supply Channel 7 Sensor supply channels 0 to 7 channels 8 to 15 24 240 VAC or 5 127 VDC 24 240 VCA or 5 127 VDC NOTE Plan for a protection fuse for the sensor supply 334 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 34 TELEFAST 2 Connection Base Accessories Aim of this Section This section introduces the TELEFAST 2 connection bases range of accessories What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page TELEFAST 2 Connection Base Accessories Catalog 336 Association Table for the Relays on ABE 7R16Txxx ABE 7P16Txxx and 338 ABE 7P16Fxxx Bases Characteristics of the Removable ABR 7xxx Electromechanical Output 340 Relays Characteristics of the Removable ABS 7Exx Static input Relays 341 Characteristics of the Removable ABS 7Sxx Static Output Relays 342 35010512 07 2011 335 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os TELEFAST 2 Connection Base Accessories Catalog At a Glance This is an overview of the TELEFAST 2 connection base accessories catalog for discrete I O modules Catalog The table below shows the TELEFAST 2 connection base accessories catalog Product Illustration Description reference Additional shunt terminal block ABE 7BV10 Terminal block fitted with 10 screw terminal blocks ABE 7BV20
128. 2 value operation timer Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of the E input a time out corresponding to the status of input Sel is launched When the time out is over the x and x Aux outputs change to 1 If the high status of input E lasts less time than the selected time out output x stays at 0 35010512 07 2011 483 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the 2 value operation timer function block x Aux String operation It is possible to increase the number of time outs which can be selected by stringing together several blocks with the x output of one forming the E input of the next Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of the E input of the first block a time out is launched corresponding to e the block whose Direct input is at 0 the status of the Sel input Note Two blocks must not simultaneously have their Direct inputs set to 0 When the time out is over the x and x Aux outputs change to 1 If the high status of the E input of the first block lasts less time than the selected time out output x stays at 0 3 The x output changes to 0 on the falling edge of the E input Note x and x Aux have identical values e the x Aux outputs can be used for tracking e when stringing together severa
129. 210 16S210 connection bases What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Actuator connections on non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 292 7R08S210 16S210 Characteristics of non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 294 7R08S210 16S210 35010512 07 2011 291 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Actuator connections on non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 7R08S210 16S210 At a Glance Illustration This is an overview of the actuator connections on TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S210 16S210 bases 8 or 16 relay outputs 1 F potential free contact Description of the connection terminal blocks E 24VDC Jog OVDC ABE7 0868210 6 Relay Outputs PLC Fuse _l 1Amax a a V U G6 G6 Y e222 Pia A nA nA A n nA a083 55958233388855 24VDC JOO OVDG ABE R16S210 6 Relay Outputs PLE Fuse 1Amax Oo Aa B UM GO B A a at a2 a3 a als gees Bl 4 nae we le le at wares 3 B SBBSGSSSHEurITIAFTGAFTSH OOO N N N N N N N 292 35010512 07 2011 TELEF
130. 35010512 07 Premium and Atrium using Unity Pro Discrete I O modules User manual 07 2011 Schneider Electric www schneider electric com The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication please notify us No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without express written permission of Schneider Electric All pertinent state regional and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements
131. 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base co TSX module outputs 1 A fast blow iy U4 20 y voc voc i ABE 7RI6T210 ABE 7P16T210 l yy ap aia 00 01 02 03 04 105 113 114 115 200 20 202 203 204 205 12 4 213 214 215 5 6 H oO rom com come oH Oo 7 ro O 4 eal Melle cbse z Jtze L Actuator a l i A actuators A 24 240 VCA 4 4 4 4 5 4 or 5 127 VDC A S b supply 2 ga fee Ves z a2 E oO oO o oO o oO o oO oO Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc E Cc es E o oO oO o oO oO oO o o x da x co coy poy O O O O O O O O O NOTE Provide one protection fuse per actuator or per group if fed from the same voltage Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit on alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 35010512 07 2011 313 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 22 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T212 P161T212 connection bases Actuator links on ABE 7R16T212 P16T212 electromechanical or static output relay bases size 10 mm
132. 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 Nb number of channels at 1 128 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 32D2K Connecting the TSX DEY 32D2K module At a Glance The TSX DEY 32D2K module comprises 32 x 24 VDC type 1 inputs This module is fitted with 2 male HE10 connectors e connector A for inputs O to 15 e connector B for inputs 16 to 31 Input circuit diagram The circuit diagram for the inputs is shown below Fuse Sensor supply and voltage monitoring Sensor Input l 0 n Entry 35010512 07 2011 129 TSX DEY 32D2K Module connection The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Inputs 10 Sensors 4 1 N DO Kv ji oO F N i es A Ololelolelollole ole a E T i X lt oO O amp V O Sensors gt inpats 4 w N N N to wo Slo Ble i oj 8 o gt 24 VDC lt oa z ll ES FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse 130 35010512 07 201
133. 6S111 Characteristics of non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 289 7RO8S111 16S111 286 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Actuator connections on non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 7R08S111 16S111 At a Glance This is a description of the actuator connections on e base TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S111 8 relay outputs 1 F twice 4 common DC or AC currents e base TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16S111 16 relay outputs 1 F twice 8 common DC or AC currents Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC gq cHOVDG ABE7 R08S111 24VDC Cy OvDC ABE7 RI6S111 16 Relay Outputs F 8Relays Outputs PLC 8 Fuse An a 8 8 a7 a9 att ats ats PLC Fuse IetAmax ag QT go C8 gy 05 gg T Fuse FlAmaxs gg a2 at o es ato ai ald 3 en oon one one Oe l l ied E a a A aeaa Le A ERE reel Bd vs Lee vc eee ag PA A O A EOR N AN zao r8 55883885 ao 85 S88 S885 88SrIez8 35010512 07 2011 287 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7
134. 80 mA maximum 90 mA Sensor supply typical 15 mA 15 x Nb mA consumption 2 maximum 19 mA 15 x Nb mA 35010512 07 2011 91 TSX DEY 16A2 Dissipated power 2 1 W 0 4 x Nb W Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 Ual Sensor supply 2 Nb number of channels at 1 NOTE the TSX DEY 16A2 module input filtering time is between 10 and 20 ms 92 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A2 Connecting the alternating voltage TSX DEY 16A2 module At a Glance The alternating voltage TSX DEY 16A2 module comprises 16 x 24 VAC type 2 inputs This module is fitted with a removable connection terminal block for the connection of inputs Circuit diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below upply monitoring Input Module 35010512 07 2011 93 TSX DEY 16A2 Module connection Sensors The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Inputs rou 2 a rowan O o mea FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse 94 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A2 Connecting the 24 VDC negative logic TSX DEY 16A2 module At a Glance The TSX DEY 16A2 module can be use in direct current with its 16 inputs in negative logic This module is fitted with a removable connection terminal block for the connection of inputs
135. 8D2 input module 67 5 TSX DEY 16D2 Discrete input module 73 6 TSX DEY 16D3 Discrete input module 81 7 TSX DEY 16A2 Discrete input module 87 8 TSX DEY 16A3 Discrete input module 97 9 TSX DEY 16A4 Discrete input module 103 10 TSX DEY 16A5 Discrete input module 109 11 The TSX DEY 16FK Discrete input module 115 12 The TSX DEY 32D2K Discrete input module 125 13 TSX DEY 32D3K Discrete input module 131 14 TSX DEY 64D2K Discrete input module 137 15 TSX DSY 08T2 output module 143 16 TSX DSY 08T22 Discrete output module 149 17 TSX DSY 08T31 Discrete output module 155 18 TSX DSY 16T2 Discrete output module 161 19 TSX DSY 16T3 Discrete output module 167 20 TSX DSY 08R5 Discrete output module 173 21 TSX DSY 08R4D Discrete output module 181 35010512 07 2011 17 Discrete specific application Chapter Chapter Name Page 22 TSX DSY 08R5A Discrete output module 189 23 TSX DSY 16R5 Discrete output module 195 24 TSX DSY 0885 Discrete output module 201 25 TSX DSY 1685 Discrete output module 207 26 TSX DSY 1684 Discrete output module 213 27 TSX DSY 32T2K Discrete output module 219 28 TSX DSY 64T2K Discrete output module 225 29 TSX DMY 28FK Discrete mixed I O module 231 30 TSX DMY 28RFK Discrete mixed I O module 239 31 TELEFAST 2 Connection Interface Links for the Discrete I O 249 Modules 32 Implementation of safety modules 343 18 35010512 07 2011 General overview of discrete I O m
136. AST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base TSX module output 1 A fast blow r doe 24 0 voc voc l FEH H ABE 7ROBS210 00 p 0 02 03 104 35 106 107 1 2 3 4 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 oO o o O 92 lt o Bes 5 Actuator 24 240 VCA or act ators 24 127 VDC oO ya N oO wv wo oO N T T T T c s s ES Cc c Cc E E E Cc E E oO oO oO oO oO oO oO ai E x x x x x O O O O O O O O Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base TSX module outputs 1 A fast blow o gt T4240 1 voc voc ABE 7RI6S210 i 00 0 02 03 04 05 113 114 5 12 3 4 20 22 22 203 204 208 23 244 245 Lois o o gt gt y Actuator 24 240 VCA or actuators 24 127 VDC oO gi N m wv wo qr y T T T T T T c Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc E Cc Cc Cc E E oO oO oO oO oOo oO oO oO oO x x x x lt P a x x x O O O O O O O O O NOTE Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit on alternating current e discharge diode for dire
137. Access Meaning Number REAC_OUT BOOL R W Reactivation of tripped outputs protected MWr m c 3 0 outputs PS_CTRL_DIS BOOL R W Inhibit control of external supply MWr m c 3 1 PS_CTRL_EN BOOL R W Validation of the external supply control MWr m c 3 2 NOTE This object is specific to output modules with reactivation 442 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Details about T_DIS_OUT_REFLEX Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange At a Glance Error Bit The following tables show IODDT of type T DIS OUT REFLEX implicit exchanges objects that apply to Discrete output reflex modules The following table presents the CH_1 ERROR lr m c ERR bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number CH_ERROR BOOL R Indicates that c channel is at fault lr m c ERR Status bit The following table presents PHYS OUT lr m c 0 and AUX_OUT lr m c 1 status bit meanings Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number PHYS OUT EBOOL R Module physical output status bit lr m c 0 AUX_OUT EBOOL R Module auxiliary output status bit lr m c 1 Event flag EVT_STS The following table shows EVT STS lWr m c 0 word bit meanings Standard Type Access Meaning Number symbol RE_EVT BOOL R Indicate that event processing is configured for positive transition lWr m c 0 0 FE_EVT BOOL R Indicate that event process
138. Chapter 15 TSX DSY 08T2 output module 0 005 143 Presentation of the TSX DSY 08T2 module 00 144 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T2 module 145 Connecting the TSX DSY 08T2 module 0 0c eee ee 147 Chapter 16 TSX DSY 08T22 Discrete output module 149 Presentation of the TSX DSY 08T22 module 150 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T22 module 151 Connecting the TSX DSY 08T22 module 0000 ee eae 153 Chapter 17 TSX DSY 08T31 Discrete output module 155 Presentation of the TSX DSY 08T31 module 156 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T31 module 157 Connecting the TSX DSY 08T31 module 0 00 ee eae 159 Chapter 18 TSX DSY 16T2 Discrete output module 161 Presentation of the TSX DSY 16T2 module 00005 162 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16T2 module 163 Connecting the TSX DSY 16T2 module 0 0000 ee eae 165 Chapter 19 TSX DSY 16T3 Discrete output module 167 Presentation of the TSX DSY 16T3 module 5 168 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16T3 module 169 Connecting the TSX DSY 16T3 module 20000055 171 Chapter 20 TSX DSY 08R5 Discrete output module 173 Presentation of the TSX DSY 08R5 module 00 174 R
139. Current 0 09 mA 2 mA 15mA 2mA Maximum switching frequency cyclic 1000 Hz 25 Hz report 50 Complies with IEC1131 2 Type 2 Type 1 Response time State 0 to 1 0 05 ms 20 ms State 1 to 0 0 4 ms 20 ms Voltage assigned to Input output 300 V insulation Voltage assigned to Input output 2 5 kV shock resistance 1 2 50 35010512 07 2011 341 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Characteristics of the Removable ABS 7Sxx Static Output Relays At a Glance The general characteristics of the removable ABS 7See static output relays for TELEFAST 2 bases are described in this section General Characteristics This table shows the general characteristics of the ABS 7See relays resistance 1 2 50 ABS 7See reference C2E A2M C3BA C3E A3M Relay width 10 mm 12 5 mm Output circuit characteristics Voltage assigned to job Direct 5 48 V 24V 5 48 V Alternating 24 240V 24 240 V Max voltage 57 6 VDC 264 VAC 30 VDC 60 VDC 264 VAC Alternating Resistive load Current 0 5A 2A current load AC12 Direct current Resistive load Current 0 5A 2A 1 5A load DC12 Inductive load Current 0 3A DC13 Filament lamp load DC6 10 W Leakage current at state 0 lt 0 5mA lt 2 mA lt 0 3 mA lt 2 MA Breakdown voltage at state 1 lt 1V lt 1 1 V lt 0 3 V lt 1 3 V Minimum current through channel 1 mA 10 mA 1 mA 10
140. D module 184 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R4D module 186 35010512 07 2011 181 TSX DSY 08R4D Presentation of the TSX DSY 08R4D module General The TSX DSY 08R4D module The TSX DSY 08R4D module is an 8 channel terminal block Discrete relay output module for direct current 182 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08R4D Fuse protection At a Glance The Discrete output models TSX DSY 08R5A TSX DSY 08R4D TSX DSY 08S5 and TSX DSY 16S5 are supplied with interchangeable fuses which can be accessed from the front panel of the modules once the terminal block is removed Illustration The following diagram shows the location of the contact protection fuses Interchangeable fuses Description The fuses can be accessed by removing the terminal block If a fuse is faulty the diagnostics are displayed on the front panel of the module The I O LED is on 35010512 07 2011 183 TSX DSY 08R4D Connecting the TSX DSY 08R4D module At a Glance The TSX DSY 08R4D module comprises 8 x protected relay output channels for direct current This module is equipped with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to be connected Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an idle operation output is shown below Channels 0 to 3 Channel 0 2 T R Channel 1 3 Common R idle T Operation
141. E 7H08R11 266 ABE 7H08R21 270 ABE 7H08S21 274 ABE 7H12R10 268 ABE 7H12R11 268 ABE 7H12R20 272 ABE 7H12R21 272 ABE 7H12R50 280 ABE 7H12S21 276 ABE 7H16F43 284 ABE 7H16R10 266 ABE 7H16R11 266 ABE 7H16R20 270 ABE 7H16R21 270 ABE 7H16R23 270 ABE 7H16R30 278 ABE 7H16R31 278 ABE 7H16R50 282 ABE 7H16S21 274 ABE 7H16S43 285 ABE 7P16F310 333 ABE 7P16F312 334 ABE 7P16T214 319 ABE 7P16T215 321 ABE 7P16T318 331 ABE 7P16T334 329 ABE 7R08S111 16S111 287 289 ABE 7R08S210 16S210 292 294 ABE 7R16S212 297 298 308 ABE 7R16T210 P16T210 312 ABE 7R16T212 P167T212 314 ABE 7R16T230 316 ABE 7R16T231 317 ABE 7R16T330 P16T330 323 ABE 7R16T332 P 161332 325 ABE 7R16T370 327 ABE 7S08S2B0 370 ABE 7S08S2B1 307 ABE 7S16S2B0 S2B2 304 ABR 7xxx relays 340 ABS 7Exx relays 341 C changing output states 454 channel data structure for discrete I O mod ules T_DIS_EVT 436 437 T_DIS_IN_GEN 432 T_DIS_IN_STD 433 434 T_DIS_OUT_GEN 439 T_DIS_OUT_REFLEX 443 444 T_DIS_OUT_STD 440 441 configurating discrete inputs 403 configurating discrete outputs 403 configuring discrete outputs 407 connection bases 249 300 D debugging discrete inputs 449 debugging discrete outputs 449 35010512 07 2011 525 Index diagnostics for discrete inputs 459 diagnostics for discrete outputs 459 E event management TSXDEY16FK 120 F fallback mode for discrete outputs 478 fault processin
142. FAST 2 for Discrete I Os Actuator connections on ABE 7S16S2B0 S2B2 static output adaptation bases At a Glance Illustration 24VDC This is an overview of actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S16S2B0 S2Bz2 bases 16 static outputs 24 VDC 0 5 A Description of the connection terminal blocks H OVDC ABE7 S16S2B0 16 non isolated outputs 24VDC 0 54 Pa ore E2Amax a a o a amp QF a Qo tO ali 2 ats al4 5 On protecte 2 gQ g a P OUE OAN EAE E ore eG E E E ek eee E eae o a e EEN D as a mMHwoo kK D QQ ODO e NO mM Pat WOW Sf ae I Go GUS Ae ee a Sh A Illustration Output connection functions Ji Supply for ABE 7 base TSX module Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base Fu Fuse rating according to the load outputs and actuators 2 A fast blow rose 1 24 0 voc voc l ABE 751552B 100 7 10 102 103 107 108 113 4 14 5 2 3 4 200 201 202 203 207 208 213 214 215 Lo o gt o lt 5 cos y SL n 4 Fu actuators lap vt w oO or oN ce co o
143. FU Quick blow interchangeable 6 3 A fuse 1 fuse per common 184 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08R4D Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an operation output is shown below Channels 4 to 7 Channel 4 6 FU Common I j amp Channel 5 7 q I 1 D FU Quick blow interchangeable 6 3 A fuse 1 fuse per common Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre actuators Outputs Q z E 2 Ti Qi eth po Co 1 5 Fu 8 O23 FU rz Hs R4 19 k Q4 La S less lt ey Oo 5 Q6 is AH c67 lt lru 20 Q7 24 130 VDC FU 6 3 A quick blow fuse 24 V strap must be connected using 24 VAC or VDC 35010512 07 2011 185 TSX DSY 08R4D Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R4D module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R4D module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R4D module The TSX DSY 08R4D module Relay outputs for direct current Threshold service voltage Direct 19 143 V see page 77 Alternating prohibited Thermal current 5A Maximum current per common 6 A value not to be exceeded Direct current load Resistive Voltage 24V 48 V 100 130 V DG
144. I LE LL I U g Be SS Beg S S aS SIS V S S gS SE S ESE SS SE SE CS SR 8s RO BS CR OF eR ROR eR ar Oe ee Se Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base Ll 1 TSX module outputs 1 A fast blow ra 0 x voc voc E ABE 7R167230 E g 100 115 300 301 101 1 2 315 5 6 F o y U oo 200 201 3 4 15 7 8 L gt G 0 0 y 4 Fo 4 Actuator gt actuators Actuator 24 240 VCA or 24 240 VCA or 5 127 VDC F wy 5 127 VDC supply T a supply 2 amp Fa oO O NOTE Provide one protection fuse per actuator or per group if fed from the same voltage Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit in the case of alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 316 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 24 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T231 connection base Actuator connections on ABE 7R16T231 electromechanical output relay base size 10 mm At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on base TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T231 with 1 OF electromechanical relay distrib
145. Interfaces for Discrete I O 251 31 2 Connection Principles for the TELEFAST 2 Interfaces for Discrete I O 261 31 3 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H08R10 08R11 and ABE 7H16R10 16R11 Connection Bases 266 31 4 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12R10 12R11 Connection Bases 268 31 5 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H08R21 and ABE 7H16R20 16R21 16R23 Connection Bases 270 31 6 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12R20 12R21 Connection Bases 272 31 7 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H08S21 16S21 Connection Bases 274 31 8 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12S21 Connection Base 276 31 9 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16R30 16R31 Connection Bases 278 31 10 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12R50 Connection Base 280 31 11 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16R50 Connection Base 282 31 12 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16F43 Connection Base 284 31 13 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16S43 Connection Base 285 31 14 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S111 16S111 connection bases 286 31 15 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S210 16S210 connection bases 291 31 16 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16S212 connection base 296 31 17 Connection bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S16E2B1 E2E1 E2E0 E2F0 E2M0 300 31 18 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S16S2BO S2B2 connection bases 303 31 19 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2B1connection base 306 31 20 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2B0 connection base 309 35010512 07 2011 249 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Section Topic Page 31 21 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T210 P16T210 connection bases 312 31 22 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T212 P16T212 connection bases 314 31 23 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T230 connection base 316 31 24 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T231 connection b
146. LEFAST 2 base TELEFAST 2 base TELEFAST 2 base Description 8 relay outputs 1 F 8 relay 16 relay 16 relay outputs 1 F 16 relay outputs 1 F with or alternating outputs 1 F outputs 1 F 2 potential free with distribution of polarity distribution potential free x 8shared or contact the 2 polarities by 8 contact alternating channel group The table below displays the catalog entry showing the connection base for the adapter splitting 16 channels into 2 x 8 channels ABE 7Ae reference Cco2 Base types Bases for adapter splitting 16 channels into 2 x 8 channels Illustration TELEFAST 2 base CF U Description Allows splitting of e 16 channels into two x 8 channels e 12 channels into 8 channels 4 channels 256 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os The table below shows the catalog of output adaptation interface bases with or without removable electromechanical or static relays with 16 channels ABE 7ee R16T210 P16T210 P16T214 R16T212 P16T212 P16T215 P16T318 reference Base types Output adaptation interface bases with or without removable electromechanical or static relays with 16 channels Sub groups Output bases 1 F potential free Output bases 1 F distribution of Output base 1 F contact the 2 polarities by 8 channel group distribution of the 2 polarities by 4 channel group Illustration TELEFAST 2 b
147. Module and external supply fault O o o External fault 24 VDC lt 19 VDC external o O o supply Internal fault module faulty o o O General fault short circuit etc o o e Legend O LED off o LED on 35010512 07 2011 383 Implementing safety modules Safety system status The following table enables us to determine the status of the safety system using LEDs 0 to 31 LEDs State Meaning 0 to 23 ES PB or PS contact open ES PB or PS contact closed o 24 O Reactivation input open or feedback loop open Reactivation input closed and feedback loop closed o 25 O Feedback loop open Feedback loop closed o 26 O K1 and K2 SS relays non controlled K1 and K2 SS relays controlled 27 O SS supply fault or fault causing a short circuit between safety system channels SS supply present o 28 to 31 O LED not in use o Legend O LED off o LED on SS Safety System NOTE an external supply fault causes the module s I O LED to come on The display block LEDs always show channel status even if there is a fault on the channel It is possible to set up external supply surveillance for this the LEDs of the display block reflect the real status of the ES PB or PS 384 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Maintenance table At a Glance The following section shows the maintenance table for safety modules Faults Possible causes Check
148. Object Exchange that applies to discrete output modules Output flag The following table presents the VALUE Qr m c bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number VALUE EBOOL R W Indicates that the c output channel is active Qr m c Error Bit The following table presents the CH_1 ERROR lr m c ERR bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number CH_ERROR BOOL R Indicates that c output channel is at fault lr m c ERR 440 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Details about T_DIS_OUT_STD Type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange At a Glance This section presents T DIS OUT STD type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange that applies to discrete output modules It regroups word type objects which bits have a particular meaning These objects are explained in detail below Example of declaring a variable IODDT_VARI1 of type T DIS OUT STD NOTE Generally bit meaning is provided for state 1 of that bit In specific cases each bit state is explained NOTE Not all bits are used Explicit exchange execution indicators EXCH_STS The following table shows exchange control bit meanings for channel EXCH STS MWr m c 0 Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number STS_IN_ PROGR BOOL R Status words reading for the channel in progress MWr m c 0 0 CMD_IN_PROGR BOOL R Command parameters exchange in progress MWr m c 0 1
149. R21 R23 Bases for Type 2 Inputs 00 0 0 ue TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12R20 12R21 Connection Bases Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H12R20 12R21 B ss 28 ssa hw dead Jaa E dace deca AAE aad kee eee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H08S21 16S21 Connection Bases Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on ABE 7H08S21 16S21 Bases with One Isolator per Channel 0 0 cece eee eee eee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12S21 Connection Base 000 Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H12S21 Base with 1 Isolator per Channel 0 0 0 c eee eee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16R30 16R31 Connection Bases Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H16R30 R31 Bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H12R50 Connection Base 055 Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H12R50 Bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16R50 Connection Base 5 Sensor and Actuator Connections on the ABE 7H16R50 Base TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16F43 Connection Base 004 Actuator Connections on ABE 7H16F43 Output Base with One Fuse and One isolator per Channel 0 000 ee eee eae TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16S43 Connection Base 005 Sensor Connections on ABE 7H16S43 Output Base with One Fuse and One Isolator per Channel 0 000 c cece ett TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S111 16S111 connection bases Actuator connections on non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 7R08S111 16S111
150. SESESSSEESESS L ENE E N oe LA E Illustration Output connection functions l Supply for ABE 7 base TSX module Type and rating of fuse outputs and actuators originally fitted to the reo gt 1 24 0 base 2 A fast blow voe voc i ABE 708S2B0 oO Tor 102 103 107 2 3 4 200 2 202 203 207 Lo gt fey 7 od Fu actuators o aa N op N T T E Cc Cc omy Cc E f Cc oO oO oO o oO c A a p eo x O O O O O Fu Fuse rating according to the load 310 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Characteristics of the ABE 7S08S2B0 static output adaptation bases At a Glance This section describes the general characteristics of the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2B0 base General characteristics This table describes the general characteristics of the ABE 7S08S2B0 base Base type ABE 7S08S2B0 Channel number 8 Output circuit characteristics Direct current load Resistive load DC12 Voltage 24 VDC Current 0 5A Inductive load DC13 Voltage 24 VDC Current 0 25 A Filament lamp 10 W Thresholds Voltage 19 30 VDC Leakage current at state 0 lt 0 3 mA Breakdown voltage at state 1 lt 0 6V Minimum current through channel 1mA Response time State 0 to 1 0 1 ms State 1 to 0 0 02 ms Built in protection measures Against overloads and short circuits Yes by current limiter and circuit breaker Id gt 0 75 A Against inductive volta
151. Suppl aed 1 switch 2 switch channel input Protector Protector closed Protector S121 to S232 open FOLecror cree open channel input S01 to S112 Feedback loop Y1 Y2 Shunt to S33 S34 C Output 13 14 C Output 23 24 C C on closing The use of the two distinct PSs switch 1 and 2 requires the mechanical elements to respect a time delay of less than 400 ms upon closure of the 2 switches The manufacturer s characteristics guarantee inhibition of the command if the time is greater than 1 s In this configuration the automatic reset is selected 354 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules 32 3 General rules for the installation of safety modules Overview This section describes the installation of the module on the rack and provides a description of the various markings on the module What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Mounting Safety Modules 356 Identification of safety modules 358 35010512 07 2011 355 Implementing safety modules Mounting Safety Modules Introduction All Premium range safety modules are standard format and therefore occupy one single position in the TSX RKYeee racks They can be installed in any position in the rack with the exception of the first two PS and 00 which are reserved for the rack supply module TSX PSYeee and the processor module TSX 57 ee
152. TEL o oS oS 16 x Fuse 05A ie 35010512 07 2011 321 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base TSX module outputs 1 A fast blow T4240 ABE TP16T215 VDC VDC ao d Channels Channels 100 101 T 102 SF 114 Bn 200 201 202 12 214 215 5 6 H o oO Ak o o o A 3 4 7 8 L oo A Actuator Fu 24 240 VCA or H 5 127 VDC A A lt 0 jo N l Fu kad Zs 3 supply O 5 a Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc E a io oS S j S 5 OO 5 Functionality per channel 6 5 0 5 A fuse Fu Fuse rating according to the load NOTE Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit in the case of alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 322 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 27 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T330 P16T330 connection bases Actuator connections on ABE 7R16T330 P16T330 electromechanical output relay bases size 12 5 mm At a Glance This is a description of the actuator connections on e the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T330 bases 16 relay outputs potential free contact with electromagnetic relay e the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T330 bases 16 relay outputs potential free contact relay not provided Illus
153. TSX DEY 16D2 module The TSX DEY 16D2 module is a 24 VDC 16 channel terminal block Discrete input module with positive logic 74 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16D2 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16D2 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16D2 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16D2 module The TSX DEY 16D2 module 24 VDC positive logic inputs Nominal input values Supply 24 VDC Current 7 mA Threshold input values at 1 Supply 211V Current 2 6 5 mA for U 11 V at 0 Supply SV Current 2 mA Sensor supply including ripple 19 30 V possibly up to 34 V limited to 1 hour every 24 hours Input impedance at nominal U 4 kOhms Response time minimum 4 ms maximum 7 ms IEC 1131 2 compliance type 2 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input current sink Paralleling of inputs 1 yes Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 18 V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance 1ms lt T lt 3ms on disappearance 8 ms lt T lt 30 ms 5 V consumption typical 80 mA maximum 90 mA Sensor supply consumption 2 typical 25 mA 7 x
154. The MAST task e The FAST task e The AUX0 3 secondary tasks NOTE The AUX0 3 tasks are only available with a TSX 57 5 4 processor NOTE Modifying this parameter is only possible in offline mode Procedure The following table shows how to define the type of task assigned to module channels Step Action 1 Open the desired module configuration screen 2 For the desired channels group click on the Task drop down menu button of the General parameters zone Result A drop down list appears Choose the desired task Confirm the modification with the Edit Validate menu command 35010512 07 2011 413 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application How to Modify the External Power Supply Error Monitoring Parameter of a Discrete Module At a Glance This parameter defines the state activation or deactivation of external power supply error monitoring It acts in groups of 16 consecutive channels Monitoring is active by default box checked NOTE For versions of discrete module lt V2 0 the version number is specified on the label on the side of the module external supply monitoring cannot be disabled Leave the function active If monitoring is disabled inadvertently after transfer and connection the Diagnostics function will detect the error automatically You can then change the setting in online mode Procedure The following table shows how to dis
155. This section presents the language objects that apply to input output security modules TSX PAY 262 and TSX PAY 282 These objects are not integrated in the IODDT linked to the Discrete modules NOTE Generally bit meaning is provided for state 1 of that bit In specific cases each bit state is explained NOTE Not all bits are used The following table presents meaning of the lr m c 0 to 27 bits Number Type Access Meaning lr m c 0 to 23 EBOOL R 24 input status words reading 12 purge button or position switches status picture lr m c 24 EBOOL R Input reading validation lr m c 25 EBOOL R Loop track reading lr m c 26 EBOOL R Security output command reading lr m c 27 EBOOL R Power supply presence on the security chain The following table presents the lr m MOD ERR error bit meanings Number Type Access Meaning lr m MOD ERR BOOL R External module supply monitoring 35010512 07 2011 447 Language Objects 448 35010512 07 2011 Debugging of discrete modules 36 Aim of this Section This section describes the Debugging aspect of the installation of the discrete specific application What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Introduction to the Debugging function of a discrete module 450 Description of the debug screen of a discrete module 451 How t
156. Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange Details about T_DIS_OUT_STD Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange Details about T_DIS_OUT_STD Type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange Details about T_DIS_OUT_REFLEX Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange e e ao Savarese en ei eS a eed each are dee A ae Details for T_DIS_OUT_REFLEX Type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange Details of the Language Objects of the T GEN_MOD Type IODDT Security Modules Language Objects Details 0 Debugging of discrete modules 0005 Introduction to the Debugging function of a discrete module Description of the debug screen of a discrete module How to access the forcing unforcing function 0000 How to access the SET and RESET commands How to access the masking unmasking of an event function How to Access the Reactivation of Outputs Command Applied outputs of a discrete module 00e eee eee eee Diagnostic of discrete modules 0 How to access the Diagnostics function of a discrete module How to access the Channel Diagnostics function of a discrete module Installation of the discrete reflex module General presentation of discrete reflex module General description of the reflex discrete module Description of the reflex discrete module 2 0 05 Configuration of the ref
157. Up enabled Up Counter input Note Maximum performance of the counter is 500 Hz with a 50 duty cycle with the Up input directly controlled by the physical input without filtering RESET Counter initialization input A Reset is required to acknowledge a change in the value of the threshold to be reached Sel Selection of the counting threshold e Sel 0 Threshold th1 selected Sel 1 Threshold th2 selected Note The maximum value of a threshold corresponds to the maximum number of pulses 65536 pulses xX Counter physical output x Aux Block internal auxiliary output Illustration E 2threshold COUNTER _ put 35010512 07 2011 499 Installation of the discrete reflex module Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the 2 threshold counter Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of the RESET input counter initialization to 0 e the x and x Aux inputs switch to 0 e counter on the rising edge of the Up input is incremented 2 On the rising edge of the Up input the counter is incremented value not accessible 3 When the selected threshold is reached the x and x Aux inputs switch to 1 Illus
158. V Current 23 mA at 0 Voltage SV Current lt 1 5 mA Sensor supply including ripple 19 30 V possibly up to 34 V limited to 1 hour every 24 hours Input impedance at nominal U 6 3 kKOhms Response time by default 4ms configurable filtering 0 1 7 5 ms in 0 5 ms steps IEC 1131 2 compliance type 1 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength Input ground or Input 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min internal logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input current sink Paralleling of inputs 1 yes Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 18V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance 8 ms lt T lt 30 ms on disappearance ims lt T lt 3ms 5 V consumption typical 300 mA maximum 350 mA Sensor supply consumption 2 typical 20 mA 3 5 x Nb mA maximum 30 mA 3 5 x Nb mA 242 35010512 07 2011 TSX DMY 28RFK Dissipated power 2 1 2 W 0 1 x Nb W Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 This characteristic is used to connect several inputs to the same module in parallel or to different modules for input redundancy 2 Nb number of channels at 1 General characteristics The following table s
159. VA 2 110 VA 6 220 VA 1 Direct current load Resistive Voltage 24V DC12 Power 24 W 6 40 W 3 Inductive Voltage 24V DC13 L R Power 10 W 8 Goms 24 W 6 Minimum switchable 1mA 5V load Response time Activation lt 8ms Deactivation lt 10 ms Type of contact normally open 176 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08R5 Built in protection against short circuits None compulsory installation of a quick blow fuse on and overloads every channel or channel group against inductive None compulsory installation in parallel to the overloads with terminals of each pre actuator of a RC circuit or MOV alternating current ZNO peak limiter appropriate to the voltage in use against inductive None compulsory installation of a discharge diode at the overloads with direct terminals of each pre actuator current Dissipated power 12 0 25 W 0 2 x Nb W Dielectric strength Output ground or 2000 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Output internal logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Power supply consumption 5V Typical 55 mA internal Maximum 65 mA 24 V relay Typical 8 5 mA 13 Maximum 10 mA Legend 1 0 1 x 10 maneuvers 2 0 15 x 10 maneuvers 3 0 3 x 10 maneuvers 4 0 5 x 108 maneuvers 5 0 7 x 10 maneuvers 6 1 x 10 maneuvers 7 1 5 x 10 maneuvers 8 2 x 10 maneuvers 9
160. X DEY 16FK Specific functions of Discrete modules programmable input filtering At a Glance Description The TSX DEY 16FK TSX DMY 28FK and TSX DMY 28RFK modules are equipped with a filtering system which is configurable per channel and allows the input filtering time to be modified The inputs of modules TSX DEY 16FK TSX DMY 28FK and TSX DMY 28RFK are filtered by e a fixed analog filter ensuring a maximum immunity of 0 1 ms for line interference filtering e a digital filter which can be configured in steps of 0 5 ms The terminal can be used to adjust this filtering in configuration mode see page 417 NOTE for bounces not to be taken into account upon closure of the mechanical contacts it is recommended to use a filtering time gt 3 ms NOTE in order to be IEC 1131 2 compliant the filtering time must be set to a value 23 5 ms 35010512 07 2011 117 TSX DEY 16FK Specific Functions of Discrete Modules Input Latching At a Glance Modules TSX DEY 16FK and TSX DMY 28FK are equipped with the input latching function The input latching function allows particularly short pulses with a duration lower than the PLC cycle time to be taken into account This function takes the pulse into account in order to process it in the following master MAST or fast FAST task cycle without interrupting the PLC cycle The pulse is taken into account when the input s status is changed which can be either e a
161. X DSY 08S5 Connecting the TSX DSY 08S5 module At a Glance The TSX DSY 08S5 module comprises 8 bidirectional triode thyristor output channels TOL A AE OE EF UE uz This module is equipped with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to be connected Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an output is shown below Output n Load 48 240 VAC supply Module Pre actuator 204 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08S5 Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre actuator Outputs FU Ultra quick blow interchangeable 5 A fuse 35010512 07 2011 205 TSX DSY 08S5 206 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 16S5 Discrete output module 25 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 16S5 module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 16S5 module 208 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16S5 module 209 Connecting the TSX DSY 16S5 module 210 35010512 07 2011 207 TSX DSY 1685 Presentation of the TSX DSY 16S5 module General The TSX DSY 1685 module The TSX DSY 16S5 module is a 16 channel terminal block Discrete bidirectional triode thyristor output module This module features protection of
162. Y 16D3 Discrete input module Overview This chapter describes the TSX DEY 16D3 module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DEY 16D3 module 82 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16D3 module 83 Connecting the TSX DEY 16D3 module 85 35010512 07 2011 81 TSX DEY 16D3 Presentation of the TSX DEY 16D3 module General The TSX DEY 16D3 module The TSX DEY 16D3 module is a 48 VDC 16 channel terminal block Discrete input module with positive logic 82 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16D3 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16D3 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16D3 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16D3 module The TSX DEY 16D3 module 48 VDC positive logic inputs Nominal input values Supply 48 VDC Current 7 mA Threshold input values at 1 Voltage 230V Current 2 6 5 mA for U 30 V at 0 Voltage lt 10 V Current lt 2 mA Sensor supply 38 60 V including ripple Input impedance at nominal U 7 kOhms Response time typical 4 ms maximum 7 ms IEC 1131 2 compliance type 2 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strengt
163. able or enable the external power supply fault monitoring function Step Action 1 Open the desired module configuration screen 2 Check the Supply monitor box in the General Parameters area 3 Confirm the modification with the Edit Enable menu command 414 35010512 07 2011 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application How to Modify the Function Parameter of a Discrete Input Module At a Glance This parameter defines the properties of the event input module TSX DEY 16FK and TSX DMY 28FK Possible parameter values are e Normal no event associated with the channel e Channel by channel status latch status on 0 or 1 e Channel by channel event processing e Event triggered on a rising edge FM e Event triggered on falling edge FM e Event triggered on rising and falling edges Event inputs are assigned an Evti process number These numbers range from e Oto 31 with a TSX P57 1 processor e 0 to 63 with a PCI processor or TSX P57 2 TSX P57 3 TSX P57 4ee e Oto 127 with a TSX P57 5 4 processor If both transition types are selected on one channel only one event number is assigned to the channel The most important event processing Evti is number 0 it can only be assigned to channel 0 NOTE The default event number is the first available in the list A number entered manually outside the tolerance range is not accepted when validating Adding deleting or changing the event number is not possible in onl
164. acceptable line capacity values Module Maximum coupling capacity 24 VDC inputs TSX DEY 32 TSX DEY 64D2K 25 nF 1 TSX DEY 16D2 45 nF 1 TSX DEY 16FK TSX DMY 28FK TSX DMY 28RFK 10 nF 1 2 30 nF 1 3 60 nF 1 4 24 to 240 VAC inputs TSX DEY 16A2 50 nF TSX DEY 16A3 60 nF TSX DEY 16A4 70 nF TSX DEY 16A5 85 nF Legend 1 Max admissible coupling capacity with 240 VAC 50 Hz line 2 Filtering 0 1 ms 3 Filtering 3 5 ms 4 Filtering 7 5 ms 42 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general implementation rules Outputs Cable routing Recommendations for use concerning Discrete I O module outputs are as follows itis recommended to segment starts protecting each one with a quick blow fuse if currents are high wires of a sufficient diameter should be used to avoid drops in voltage and overheating Precautions for use to be taken concerning the wiring system are as follows in order to reduce the number of alternating couplings power circuit cables power supplies power switches etc must be separated from input cables sensors and output cables pre actuators both inside and outside the equipment outside the equipment cables leading to inputs outputs should be placed in covers that make them easily distinguishable from those containing wires relaying high energy levels They should also be placed preferably in separate grounded metal cabl
165. ach module provide information on the operational state of the module e The green RUN LED indicates that the module is operational e The red ERR LED indicates an internal module fault or a fault between the module and the rest of the configuration e The red I O LED indicates an external fault e LEDs 0 to 27 indicate the status of the safety system 0 to 11 status of ES PB or PS channel contacts 12 to 23 status of ES PB or PS channel contacts 24 reactivation input status 25 feedback loop status 26 safety relay control status 27 supply present on the safety system safety system diagnostics e LEDs 28 to 31 are not used 382 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Diagnostics of safety modules At a Glance A faulty module will be indicated by the lighting up or flashing of the RUN ERR and I O LEDs There are three classes of fault e external errors e internal errors e other errors Internal faults are the result of a safety module self check External faults are linked to the safety modules external supply State of module The following table allows a failure diagnosis to be made on the basis of the three LEDs RUN ERR and I O State of module Status LEDs RUN ERR 1 0 Rack off or module fault O O O Normal operation or module not recognized if no supply bd O Faulty module O o O External supply fault O O e
166. actuators Outputs o 9 Is H iS gt i O OlO Q SS a D lel OV 3 FU2 24VDC z FU2 16 A quick blow fuse 154 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08T31 Discrete output module 17 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 08T31 module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 08T31 module 156 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T31 module 157 Connecting the TSX DSY 08T31 module 159 35010512 07 2011 155 TSX DSY 08T31 Presentation of the TSX DSY 08T31 module General The TSX DSY 08T31 module The TSX DSY 08T31 module is an 8 channel terminal block Discrete transistor output module for direct current positive logic 156 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08T31 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T31 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T31 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T31 module The TSX DSY 08T31 module 24 VDC positive logic transistor outputs Nominal values Voltage 48 VDC Current 1A Threshold values 1 Voltage including 38
167. ait until the bit MWr m c 0 2 switches to 0 430 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects 35 2 IODDTs of the Discrete modules Aim of this section This section presents the different IODDT languages and objects related to Discrete input output modules What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Details about T_DIS_IN_GEN Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange 432 Details about T_DIS_IN_STD Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange 433 Details about T_DIS_IN_STD Type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange 434 Details about T_DIS_EVT Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange 436 Details about T_DIS_EVT Type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange 437 Details about T_DIS_OUT_GEN Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange 439 Details about T_DIS_OUT_STD Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange 440 Details about T_DIS_OUT_STD Type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange 441 Details about T_DIS_OUT_REFLEX Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange 443 Details for T_ DIS_OUT_REFLEX Type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange 444 Details of the Language Objects of the T_GEN_MOD Type IODDT 446 Security Modules Language Objects Details 447 35010512 07 2011 431 Language Objects Details about T_DIS_IN_GEN Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange At a Glance Input flag This section describes T DIS _ IN GI applies to all discrete input modules The following table presents the VALUE lr m c bit
168. apply an off delay to an action Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration E Timer input Output x Timer s physical output mee E eye x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output m Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the idle timer Phase Description 1 The x output changes to 1 when the E input changes to 1 2 On the falling edge of the E input time out ti is launched time base of 0 1ms When the time out is over the x output changes to 0 If the low status of input E lasts less time than ti output x stays at 1 Note The values of outputs x and x Aux are identical Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the idle timer function block x Aux 480 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Operation idle timer Role This function is used to apply an on off delay to an action Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration E Timer input x Timers physical output x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the operation idle timer Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of the E input on delay time out tri is launched time base of 0 1ms When time out tri is over the x
169. ase Description with 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm wide with 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm wide 12 5 mm wide wide wide relay not wide wide relay not relay not electro relay not provided 1 electro relay not provided 1 provided 1 fuse mechanical provided fuse channel mechanical provided fuse channel 1 isolator channel relay relay 35010512 07 2011 257 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os The table below shows the catalog of output adaptation interface bases with or without removable electromechanical or static relays with 16 channels continued ABE R16T230 R16T330 P161T330 P16T334 R16T231 R16T332 P16T332 R16T370 7e ref erence Base Output adaptation interface bases with or without removable electromechanical or static relay with types 16 channels continued Sub Output bases 1 OF potential free contact Output Output bases 1 Output groups bases 1 OF OF distribution of bases 2 OF shared by 8 the 2 polarities by potential channel 8 channel group _ free contact group llus TELEFAST 2 base tration De with 10 mm with 12 5 mm 12 5 mm 12 5 mm wide with 10 mm_ with 12 5 mm with 12 5 mm scrip wide elec wide electro wide relay not pro wide electro 12 5 mm wide wide electro tion tro me mechanical relay not vided mechanical wide relay not mechanical chanical relay provided 1 fuse
170. ase Description 1 On the rising edge of input E e the time out corresponding to the status of input Sel is launched output x Aux changes to 1 When the selected time out is over e output x changes to 1 output x Aux changes to 0 If the high status of input E lasts less time than the selected time out output x stays at 0 On the falling edge of input E e the time out corresponding to the status of input Sel is launched output x Aux changes to 1 When the selected time out is over output x changes to 1 output x Aux changes to 0 If the low status of input E lasts less time than the selected time out output x stays at 0 The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the operation idle timer with value selection function block x Aux 35010512 07 2011 487 Installation of the discrete reflex module String operation It is possible to increase the number of time outs which can be selected by stringing together several blocks with the x output of one forming the E input of the next Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input E of the first block e the time out is launched corresponding to e the block whose Direct input is at 0 e the status of the Sel input e output x Aux changes to 1 Note Two blocks must not simultaneously have their Direct inputs set to
171. ase 317 31 25 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T214 connection base 319 31 26 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T215 connection base 321 31 27 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T330 P16T330 connection bases 323 31 28 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T332 P16T332 connection bases 325 31 29 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T370 connection base 327 31 30 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T334 connection base 329 31 31 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T318 connection base 331 31 32 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16F310 connection base 333 31 33 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16F312 connection base 334 31 34 TELEFAST 2 Connection Base Accessories 335 250 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 1 Introduction to the TELEFAST 2 Connection Interfaces for Discrete I O Aim of this section This section describes the range of TELEFAST 2 products which allow the discrete input and output modules to be connected quickly to the operating pieces What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page General Overview of TELEFAST 2 Connection Interfaces for Discrete I O 252 Modules TELEFAST 2 Connection Bases Catalog 253 Combination of Premium I O modules and TELEFAST 2 connection bases 259 35010512 07 2011 251 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os General Overview of TELEFAST 2 Connection Interfaces for Discrete I O Modules At a Glance The TELEFAST 2 system is a group of products which enableS discrete input and output modules to be quickly connected to operational components It
172. at set up supply faults are not indicated Emergency stop input With the outputs closed activate every emergency stop one at a time in order to check that outputs switch to safety mode LED 26 should switch from on to off Check safety system activation and that diagnostic data is consistent Feedback loop input The feedback loop provides the module with a real image of the safety outputs it is open when outputs are active The device used is a guided contact relay for controlling outputs e Open loop LED 25 off e Closed loop LED 25 on Check the status of the feedback loop in relation to the output control 35010512 07 2011 387 Implementing safety modules Activation of reactivation input Activating the reactivation input between terminals S33 and S34 allows the system to be reactivated when no ES has been requested AND if the feedback loop is closed the device used is a push button activated on falling edge or status It is only possible to read the status of the reactivation input if the feedback loop is also closed e Open contact LED 24 off e Closed contact LEDs 24 and 25 on Depending on which reactivation option has been chosen check for correct operation and check the diagnostic indicators Output control status Depending on the module TSX PAY 262 or TSX PAY 282 two or four outputs are available between terminals 13 14 23 24 33 34 and 43 44 These outputs allow the contactors or p
173. ate each sensor and check that the corresponding input LED changes status 2 Check on the terminal screen that the corresponding input bit le also changes status The following table shows the procedure for checking output connections Step Action 1 From the terminal set each bit Qe that corresponds to an output to 1 then 0 2 Check that the corresponding output LED turns on then off and that the corresponding pre actuator activates then de activates 35010512 07 2011 65 Discrete fault processing 66 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 08D2 input module Overview This chapter describes the TSX DEY 08D2 module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DEY 08D2 module 68 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 08D2 module 69 Connecting the TSX DEY 08D2 module 71 35010512 07 2011 67 TSX DEY 08D2 Presentation of the TSX DEY 08D2 module General The TSX DEY 08D2 module The TSX DEY 08D2 module is a 24 VDC 8 channel terminal block Discrete input module with positive logic 68 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 08D2 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 08D2 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 08D2 module General characteristics The foll
174. ation of the TSX DSY 16T2 module 162 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16T2 module 163 Connecting the TSX DSY 16T2 module 165 35010512 07 2011 161 TSX DSY 16T2 Presentation of the TSX DSY 16T2 module General The TSX DSY 16T2 module The TSX DSY 16T2 module is an 16 channel terminal block Discrete transistor output module for direct current positive logic 162 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 16T2 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16T2 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 16T2 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 16T2 module The TSX DSY 16T2 module 24 VDC positive logic transistor outputs Nominal values Voltage 24 VDC Current 0 5A Threshold values 1 Voltage including ripple 19 30 V 34 V possible for 1 hour every 24 hours Current channel 0 625 A Current module 7A Power of tungsten filament lamp Maximum 6W Leakage current at 0 lt 0 5 mA Voltage drop at 1 lt 1 2V Load impedance minimum 48 Ohms Response time 2 1 2 ms Frequency of switching to inductive load 0 5 LI2 Hz Paralleling of outputs Yes maximum of 2 Compatibility with IEC 1131 2 DC inputs Yes type 1 and type 2 Built in protection against over voltage Yes by Transil diode against inversions Yes by inverted di
175. ational function using the auxiliary output of the first combinational as an intervening variable 12 0 0 12 4 0 tl 12 16 1 Suis aA adi 12 10 0 ies w280 f a E OUT 16 Aux She E p y OUT 17 Aux Ee Ge oe 478 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Operation timer Role This function is used to apply an on delay to an action Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration E Timer input bee C Ty OR x Timers physical output x Aux Block s internal auxiliary ti output Output x Aux Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the operation timer Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of the E input time out ti is launched time base of 0 1ms 2 When the time out is over the x output changes to 1 If the high status of input E lasts less time than ti output x stays at 0 Note The values of outputs x and x Aux are identical Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the operation timer function block x Aux 35010512 07 2011 479 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Idle timer Role This function is used to
176. ay bidirectional triode thyristor outputs e comply with the specified maximum current e where low consumption pre actuators are used special attention must be paid to the leakage current of the idle output to ensure that the following inequation is satisfied nominal gt 50 x leakage given that nominal current consumed by the pre actuator leakage leakage current in idle output state 54 35010512 07 2011 Fault processing for Discrete I O modules 3 Overview This chapter presents hardware fault processing for Discrete I O modules What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page General protective measures of Discrete I O modules 56 Discrete Inputs Outputs fault display 57 Discrete Inputs Outputs Fault Diagnostics 60 Checking the Discrete Input Output connection 64 35010512 07 2011 55 Discrete fault processing General protective measures of Discrete I O modules At a Glance DC outputs DC inputs The following is a description of the general protective measures integrated into the channels of Discrete I O direct current modules Every transistor output except where specifically labeled Non Protected features a protective device which allows the following to be detected when an output is active an overload or short circuit failures such as these cause the output to be deactivated tripped and the failure
177. be connected Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an output is shown below Output n H l i i i i Load H i j O oe VAC ru pply a ee REIN Sry RNR RETIREE PEIN Module Pre actuator 210 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 1685 Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre actuator Outputs 48 240 VAC FU Ultra quick blow interchangeable 5 A fuse 35010512 07 2011 211 TSX DSY 1685 212 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 16S4 Discrete output module 26 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 16S4 module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 1684 module 214 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16S4 module 215 Connecting the TSX DSY 16S4 module 216 35010512 07 2011 213 TSX DSY 1684 Presentation of the TSX DSY 16S4 module General The TSX DSY 1684 module The TSX DSY 16S4 module is a 16 channel terminal block Discrete bidirectional triode thyristor output module 214 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 1684 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16S4 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 1684 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteri
178. bol name of the channel defined by the user using the variable editor 4 General Specifies the parameters of the channel parameters e Function specifies the function configured This heading is frozen field e Task specifies the MAST or FAST or AUX0 3 task configured This heading is frozen Specifies the parameters of the channel e Function the Global unforcing button provides direct access to the global unforcing of channels function e Task specifies the MAST or FAST or AUX0 3 task configured This heading is frozen 5 Current This field displays the state of inputs and outputs and the various current parameters parameters For each channel there are four columns field e Symbol displays the symbol associated with the channel when it has been defined by the user using the variable editor e Value displays the state of each channel of the module e Error provides direct access to channel by channel diagnostics when these are faulty indicated by the LED built into the diagnostics access which turns red e Applied outputs to indicate the output fallback see page 457 position 452 35010512 07 2011 Debugging of discrete modules How to access the forcing unforcing function At a Glance This function allows you to modify the state of all or part of the channels of a module The state of a forced output is frozen and can only be modified by the application after unforcing NOTE However in the event of a fault
179. channel relay electro provided relay relay mechani cal relay The table below shows the catalog of input bases for 12 5 mm wide static relays ABE 7Pee reference 16F310 16F312 Base types Input bases for 12 5 mm wide static relays Illustration TELEFAST 2 base Description potential free distribution of the 2 polarities by 8 channel group 258 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Combination of Premium I O modules and TELEFAST 2 connection bases At a Glance The following shows the possible combinations of Discrete I O modules and TELEFAST 2 connection bases Compatibility table The following table summarizes compatibility between Discrete I O modules and TELEFAST 2 connection bases TSX Discrete I O modules and modularity DEY 16FK DEY 32D2K DEY 32D3K DSY 32T2K DMY 28FK DEY 64D2K DSY 64T2K DMY 28RFK 1x 161 2x161 4x161 2x161 2x160 4x160 1x161 1x120 TELEFAST 2 connection bases Connection bases 8 channels ABE 7HO8Ree Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 l Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 l ABE 7H08S21 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 l Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 l 12 channels ABE 7H12Ree Yes ABE 7H12S21 Yes 16 channels ABE 7H16Ree Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 Yes Yes Yes ABE 7H16S21 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ABE 7H16R23 Yes Ye
180. characterisitics Job limit voltage Alternating 250 V Direct 30 V Thermal current 3A Alternating current Resistive load AC12 Voltage 230 VAC load Current 1 0 6A Inductive load AC15 Voltage 230 VAC Current 1 0 4 A Direct current load Resistive load DC12 Voltage 24 VDC Current 1 0 6A Inductive load DC13 2 Voltage 24 VDC Current 1 0 2 A Minimum switching Current 1 mA Voltage 5V Response time State 0 to 1 10 ms State 1 to 0 6 ms Maximum speed of function loading 0 5 Hz Built in protection Against overloads and short circuits None provide one rapid fusion fuse per measures channel or group of channels Against alternating current inductive overcharging None each RC circuit or MOV ZNO suppressor must be mounted on the posts of each pre actuator appropriate to the voltage Against direct current inductive overcharging none each discharge diode must be mounted on the posts of each pre actuator 35010512 07 2011 289 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Base types ABE 7R08S111 ABE 7R16S111 Voltage assigned to insulation Coil contact 300 V Voltage assigned to shock resistance 1 2 50 Coil contact 2 5 kV Key 1 For 0 5 x 108 maneuvers 2 L R 10 ms 290 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 15 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S210 16S210 connection bases Aim of this section This section introduces the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S
181. contacts by interchangeable fuses see page 183 208 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 1685 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16S5 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 1685 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 16S5 module The TSX DSY 16S5 module Bidirectional triode thyristor outputs Threshold service voltage Direct prohibited Alternating 41 264 V Admissible current channel 1A see page 77 module 12A Leakage current 2 mA Response time Activation lt 10 ms Deactivation lt 10 ms Built in protection against over voltage R C and Ge Mov circuit against short circuits and overloads interchangeable quick blow fuse per common 5A Dissipated power 0 85 W 1 W per A and per output Dielectric strength Output ground or Output internal logic 2000 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC 5 V supply consumption Typical 220 mA Maximum 230 mA 35010512 07 2011 209 TSX DSY 1685 Connecting the TSX DSY 16S5 module At a Glance The TSX DSY 16S5 module comprises 16 bidirectional triode thyristor output channels S g This module is equipped with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to
182. crete Specific Application Over 8 track modules on rack Discrete Output Parameter for Modules with more than 8 Channels on the Rack At a Glance Discrete output modules with more than 8 channels include parameters for channels or for the set of channels Parameters The following table displays the parameters available for each discrete output module with more than 8 channels on the rack 8 channel group Channel by channel Reference Number of Task Reactivation Fallback On Power Fallback module outputs Group mode supply fault value TSX DSY 16S5 16 Mast Fast Programmed Fallback 0 1 AUXi Automatic Maintenance TSX DSY 16T2 16 Mast Fast Programmed Fallback Active AUXi Automatic Maintenance Inactive TSX DSY 16T3 16 Mast Fast Programmed Fallback Active 0 1 AUXi Automatic Maintenance Inactive TSX DSY 32T2K 32 Mast Fast Programmed Fallback Active 0 1 AUXi Automatic Maintenance Inactive TSX DSY 64T2K 64 Mast Fast Programmed Fallback Active 0 1 AUXi Automatic Maintenance Inactive TSX DSY 16R5 16 Mast Fast Fallback 0 1 AUXi Maintenance TSX DSY 1684 16 Mast Fast Fallback 0 1 AUXi Maintenance TSX DMY 28FK 12 outputs Mast Fast Programmed Fallback Active 0 1 AUXi Automatic 1 Maintenance Inactive TSX DMY 28RFK 12 outputs Mast Fast Programmed Fallback Active 0 1 AUXi Automatic 1 Maintenance Inactive Con
183. ct current 35010512 07 2011 293 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Characteristics of non removable relay output adaptation bases ABE 7R08S210 16S210 At a Glance This section describes the general characteristics of bases TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R08S210 16S210 General characteristics This table describes the general characteristics of bases ABE 7R08S210 16S210 Base types ABE 7R08S210 ABE 7R16S210 Channel number 8 16 Contact characteristics Job limit voltage Alternating 250 V Direct 125 V Thermal current 5A Alternating current Resistive load AC12 Voltage 230 VAC load Current 1 1 5A Inductive load AC15 Voltage 230 VAC Current 1 0 9 A Direct current load Resistive load DC12 Voltage 24 VDC Current 1 1 5A Inductive load DC13 2 Voltage 24 VDC Current 1 0 6A Minimum switching Current 10 mA Voltage 5V Response time State 0 to 1 10 ms State 1 to 0 5 ms Maximum speed of function loading 0 5 Hz Built in protection Against overloads and short circuits None provide one rapid fusion fuse per measures channel or group of channels Against alternating current inductive overcharging None each RC circuit or MOV ZNO suppressor must be mounted on the posts of each pre actuator appropriate to the voltage Against direct current inductive overcharging None each discharge diode must be mounted on the posts of each pre actuator
184. cted Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an output is shown below i f Currant Transil ll RY Monitoring Trdhnsil k Control ta en Pre actuator Voltage Solid state i Monitoring switch Module Output 35010512 07 2011 165 TSX DSY 16T2 Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre actuators Outputs o D 9 Qe 1 2 1 hws 2 3 2 3 4 3 4 5 4 5 6 5 6 7 6 7 8 7 Z EE ard 8 9 8 9 D 9 10 11 10 1 2 11 12 3 l E N3y 14 5 14 15 16 15 18 OV 9 60 FU2 24VDC FU2 6 3 A quick blow fuse 166 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 16T3 Discrete output module 19 Subject of this chapter This chapter describes the TSX DSY 16T3 module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 16T3 module 168 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16T3 module 169 Connecting the TSX DSY 16T3 module 171 35010512 07 2011 167 TSX DSY 16T3 Presentation of the TSX DSY 16T3 module General The TSX DSY 16T3 module The TSX DSY 16T3 module is a 16 channel terminal block Discrete trans
185. cted relay output channels for 5 A thermal current This module is equipped with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to be connected Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an idle operation output is shown below Channels 0 to 3 Channel 0 2 R Channel 1 3 Common R Idle T Operation FU Quick blow interchangeable 6 3 A fuse 1 fuse per common 35010512 07 2011 193 TSX DSY 08R5A Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an operation output is shown below Channels 4 to 7 Channel 4 6 a FU Common 1 i i 1 Channel 5 7 9 i i i 1 I i 1 9 FU Quick blow interchangeable 6 3 A fuse 1 fuse per common Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre actuators Outputs 24 V strap must be connected using 24 VAC or VDC aa 19 240 VAC or 19 60 VDC nominal 48 VDC FU 6 3 A quick blow fuse 194 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 16R5 Discrete output module 23 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 16R5 module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 16R5 module 196 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16R5 module 197
186. ction e remove power fuses from the motor controls e shut off the hydraulic and pneumatic units e then power up the PLC fitted with its Discrete I O modules Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Description It is possible to check the connection of the Discrete I O modules e without a terminal e by activating each sensor and checking whether the corresponding input LED changes status If it remains unchanged check the wiring and correct operation of the sensor e using the terminal e using a terminal it is possible to perform a more comprehensive I O check To do this an application with configured I Os at minimum an empty application is sufficient but if the application is empty no module should be declared in the FAST task should be previously loaded onto the PLC from a programming terminal e this check can be carried out with the PLC in RUN mode from a PC equipped with Unity Pro software giving access to debug functions e this check can also be carried out with the entire application loaded in the memory In this case stop the processing of the program by de activating the MAST FAST and event tasks see page 413 by setting system bits S30 31 S38 to 0 64 35010512 07 2011 Discrete fault processing Input check Output check The following table shows the procedure for checking input connections Step Action 1 Activ
187. d lt 0 5 LI Error detection report Yes Voltage assigned to insulation Input output 300 V Voltage assigned to shock resistance 1 2 50 Input output 2 5 kV Key 1 1 channel out of 2 alternating between 50 C and 60 C 308 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 20 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2B0 connection base Aim of this section This section describes the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2B0 connection base What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Actuator connections on the ABE 7S08S2B0 static output adaptation base 310 Characteristics of the ABE 7S08S2B0 static output adaptation bases 311 35010512 07 2011 309 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Actuator connections on the ABE 7S08S2B0 static output adaptation base At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2B0 bases 8 static outputs 24 VDC 0 5 A Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 424VDC my 1 OVDC ABE7 S08S2B0 8 non isolated outputs 24VDC 0 54 Pe Gr Ema oa g BUGET On protecte PEF P a a rm a outputs only L aa f i il i an n S8S8S5RES8SSS
188. diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Sensors 1 Outputs O Gt Gi koca A 5 8 0 2 G a a 12 T24 VDC Fut Da ov FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse 246 35010512 07 2011 TSX DMY 28RFK Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre actuators Outputs 3 Qis 16 N 2 17 17 f a 18 O Oh 19 50 20 LO am 21 22 4 22 823 O Ota 24 O Gt 25 J 36 26 11 2427 27 d T J 15 46 17 18 oV T 19 FU2 24 VDC FU2 10 A quick blow fuse 35010512 07 2011 247 TSX DMY 28RFK 248 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 Connection Interface Links for the Discrete I O Modules 31 Aim of this Chapter This chapter describes the TELEFAST 2 interface links for the discrete input output modules What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 31 1 Introduction to the TELEFAST 2 Connection
189. dule to the pre actuators Pre actuator Outputs FU FU FU FU 24 120 VAC FU Ultra quick blow interchangeable 5 A fuse 35010512 07 2011 217 TSX DSY 1684 218 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 32T2K Discrete output module 27 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 32T2K module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 32T2K module 220 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 32T2K module 221 Connecting the TSX DSY 32T2K module 223 35010512 07 2011 219 TSX DSY 32T2K Presentation of the TSX DSY 32T2K module General The TSX DSY 32T2K module The TSX DSY 32T2K module is a 32 channel connector Discrete transistor output module for direct current 220 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 32T2K Characteristics of the TSX DSY 32T2K module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 32T2K module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 32T2K module TSX DSY 32T2K module 24 VDC positive logic transistor outputs Nominal values Voltage 24 VDC Current 0 1A Threshold values 1 Voltage including ripple 19 30 V 34 V possible for 1 hour every 24 hours
190. e At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DMY 28FK mixed module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DMY 28FK module inputs The TSX DMY 28FK module 24 VDC positive logic inputs Nominal input values Voltage 24 VDC Current 3 5 mA Threshold input values at 1 Voltage 211V Current 2 3 mA at 0 Voltage SV Current lt 1 5 mA Sensor supply including ripple 19 30 V possibly up to 34 V limited to 1 hour every 24 hours Input impedance at nominal U 6 3 kOhms Response time by default 4ms configurable filtering 0 1 7 5 ms in 0 5 ms steps IEC 1131 2 compliance type 1 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength Input ground or Input 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min internal logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input current sink Paralleling of inputs 1 yes Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 18V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance 8 ms lt T lt 30 ms on disappearance ims lt T lt 3ms 5 V consumption typical 300 mA maximum 350 mA Sensor supply consumption 2 typical 20 mA 3 5 x Nb mA maximum 30 mA 3 5 x Nb mA 35010512 07 2011 233 TSX DMY 28FK Diss
191. e This is an overview of the sensor and pre actuator connections on TELEFAST 2 bases NOTE The bases are manufactured with a general purpose quick blow fuse rated 2 A To guarantee optimum protection this fuse should be rated according to the application connection to input or output functions and the maximum current allowable in the base Type and rating of fuse to be fitted to the base e input functions 0 5 A quick blow e output functions e 2A quick blow on the ABE 7H16Ree base e 6 3 A quick blow on the ABE 7HO8Ree base Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks LoVe OVDC ABE HOBR2T LoavDC CHO CHA OVDC ABE 7H16R2 16 Digital Inputs Outputs F H 8 Digital O hal 012345 67 8 9 1011 12 1314 15 are ate SORT N et T Boor ayer Leen L 8 ao 858838858885 772 B sjo 85 8835885 Looooooooooodd Sssgsees RRARRRRRRRRAAARAA 270 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Connections for input and output functions Module and sensor f Module and pre actuator suppl suppl supply oo SuPPIY 24 0 24 0 VDC VDC VDG VDC ABE ABE ABE ABE 7HO8R21 7H16R20 21 7HO8R21 7H16R20 21 7H16R23 N 3 gt S Nt 3 gt S ee gt LT A Z O o oO an doy O elal s e a lal s I pre sensors dp actuators 2 2 2 g
192. e TSX DEY 16A5 module 110 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A5 module 4 111 Connecting the TSX DEY 16A5 module 000 eee ae 113 The TSX DEY 16FK Discrete input module 115 Presentation of the TSX DEY 16FK module 116 Specific functions of Discrete modules programmable input filtering 117 Specific Functions of Discrete Modules Input Latching 118 Specific Functions of Discrete Modules Input Event Management 120 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16FK module 121 Connecting the TSX DEY 16FK module 0 00055 123 The TSX DEY 32D2K Discrete input module 125 Presentation of the TSX DEY 32D2K module 126 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 32D2K module 127 Connecting the TSX DEY 32D2K module 20005 129 35010512 07 2011 Chapter 13 TSX DEY 32D3K Discrete input module 131 Presentation of the TSX DEY 32D3K module 132 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 32D3K module 133 Connecting the TSX DEY 32D3K module 000 eee ae 135 Chapter 14 TSX DEY 64D2K Discrete input module 137 Presentation of the TSX DEY 64D2K module 138 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 64D2K module 139 Connecting the TSX DEY 64D2K module 2 00 ee eae 141
193. e displays current errors where these exist classed according to their category e internal faults e module failures e self test running e external faults e terminal block fault e other faults e configuration fault e module missing or off e faulty channel s see page 462 A module fault is indicated when certain LEDS change to red such as e inthe configuration editor at rack level e the LED of the rack number e the LED of the slot number of the module on the rack e inthe configuration editor at module level e the I O LED according to the type of fault e the Channel LED in the Channel field e the Fault tab 460 35010512 07 2011 Diagnostic of discrete modules Procedure The following table shows the procedure for accessing the Module fault screen Step Action 1 Access the module s debug screen 2 Click on the module reference in the channel zone and select the Fault command Result The list of module faults appears Internal errors External errors Other errors Faulty channel s Note When a configuration fault occurs in the event of major failure or absence of the module access to the module diagnostics screen is not possible The following message then appears on the screen The module is not present or different from the one configured in this position 35010512 07 2011 461 Diagnostic of discrete modules
194. e following diagram shows the method for opening the screw terminal block door 35010512 07 2011 45 Discrete general implementation rules Connecting Discrete I O Modules HE10 Connector Modules At a Glance HE10 connector modules are connected to sensors pre actuators or terminal blocks using a pre formed cable designed to allow the smooth and direct transition of module inputs outputs from wire to wire Pre Formed Cable TSX CDP 301 501 The 3 meter long TSX CDP 301 or 5 meter long TSX CDP 501 pre formed cables consist of e a molded HE10 connector at one end with 20 protruding sheathed wires with a cross section of 0 34 mm e free wires at the other end differentiated by a color code complying with DIN 47100 NOTE A nylon thread built into the cable allows easy stripping of the sheath NOTE HE10 connectors must be engaged or disengaged with sensor and pre actuator voltage switched off 46 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general implementation rules The diagram below shows the connection of the pre formed cable to the module Module Pre formed cable Top hi HE10 brown QO yellow 3 pin 5 j red 7 8 oaiae ae Xe mamane Tt ea axe f brown green 43 QA a eaRDIaa 9 06 a a 09 ote PN ma T TSX CDP 301 501 Bottom 35010512 07 2011 47 Discrete general implementation rules Connecting
195. e standard status LEDs Input synchronization Approx ms lt 1 s automatic start up TSXee reference number PAY 262 PAY 282 Legend ES PB emergency stop push button PS position switch c normally open 35010512 07 2011 347 Implementing safety modules 32 2 Safety functions Overview This section gives a description of every function for which the safety modules are used What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Product user functions 349 Operating modes 350 Functional diagrams 353 348 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Product user functions General The TSX PAY 2 2 modules provide the following functions Monitoring of emergency stop buttons and moving cover position switches for immediate halt category 0 emergency stop in compliance with EN 418 Channel de synchronization detection gt 400 ms in automatic start up mode Cabled safety block independent of Premium PLC operating mode Guaranteed safety functions whatever the safety system component failure via e 2 safety output circuits e double contact inputs for ES PB or PS Wiring of a channel of an input x and of the channel to another input x 12 with a double contact Self checking and redundant design similar to the PREVENTA XPS ASF range cf component catalog for Telemecanique safet
196. e x and x Aux outputs are the same The illustration below summarizes the Direct function TSX DM 28 RFK module Inputs Outputs PLC task Acquisition of inputs Processing of the application Outputs updated 476 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Combinational Role Structure Operation Illustration 1 This functions is used to create a logical function between the inputs and one or more outputs of the module The table below shows the various interfaces of the block Name Meaning x Physical output of the block x Aux Auxiliary output within the block The logic function entered is directly applied to the output x The values of the x and x Aux outputs are the same NOTE a logical function can consist of several combinational functions by using the PHYS OUT lr m c 0 and AUX_OUT lr m c 1 bits associated with the channels of the outputs as intervening variables The illustration below shows an example of a simple combinational function 12 1 0 12 0 0 vV 12 4 0 OUT 16 L adk MECLIS E A260 OUT 16 Aux 4 35010512 07 2011 477 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration 2 12 1 0 Wli 4 The illustration below shows an example of a combin
197. eam e conveyor belt operational when the speed of the downstream belt is greater than the high threshold 1 t1i e conveyor belt stops when the speed of the downstream belt is less than the low threshold 1 t2i This involves analyzing the time elapsed between 2 consecutive pulses on control input FB The following graph illustrates the application example given above Speed 1 t1i Speed 1 t2i A Speed of the downstream belt x Aux 510 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the speed monitoring function Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input E time out tti is launched input x changes to 1 As long as the interval between 2 rising edges of input FB remains greater than tli e time out tti is relaunched on the rising edge of input FB If the interval between 2 rising edges of input FB falls below t1i output x Aux changes to 1 time out t2i is launched If input E changes to 0 outputs x and x Aux change to 0 x Aux Iti Speed As long as the interval between 2 rising edges of input FB is less than t2i time out t2i is relaunched on the rising edge of input FB If the interval between 2 rising edges of input FB becomes greater than t2i output x Aux changes to 0 time out t1i is launched see phase If input E changes to 0
198. eck response time on appearance T lt 4ms on disappearance T lt 30 ms 234 35010512 07 2011 TSX DMY 28FK 24 V pre actuator consumption 4 typical 30 mA maximum 40 mA Dissipated power 5 2 4 W 0 75 x Nb W Dielectric strength Output ground or Output 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min internal logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of max module current Legend 1 For U lt 30 V or 34 V 2 All the outputs are equipped with fast electromagnet demagnetization circuits Electromagnet discharge time lt L R 3 Fit a fuse to the 24 V pre actuator supply 4 Excluding load current 5 Nb number of outputs at 1 35010512 07 2011 235 TSX DMY 28FK Connecting the TSX DMY 28FK module At a Glance The TSX DMY 28FK mixed I O module comprises 16 x 24 VDC fast input channels and 12 x 24 VDC 0 5A output channels This module is fitted with 2 male HE10 connectors e Connector A reserved for inputs addresses 0 to 15 e Connector C reserved for outputs addresses 16 to 27 Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below Eg ey Sensor supply and FU voltage monitoring Sensor Input I 0 15 Entry Module 236 35010512 07 2011 TSX DMY 28FK Circuit Diagram The circuit diag
199. ection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 08T2 module 144 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T2 module 145 Connecting the TSX DSY 08T2 module 147 35010512 07 2011 143 TSX DSY 08T2 Presentation of the TSX DSY 08T2 module General The TSX DSY 08T2 module The TSX DSY 08T2 module is an 8 channel terminal block Discrete transistor output module for direct current positive logic 144 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08T2 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T2 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T2 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T2 module The TSX DSY 08T2 module 24 VDC positive logic transistor outputs Nominal values Voltage 24 VDC Current 0 5A Threshold values 1 Voltage including ripple 19 30 V 34 V possible for 1 hour every 24 hours Current channel 0 625 A Current module 4A Power of tungsten filament lamp Maximum 6W Leakage current at 0 lt 0 5 mA Voltage drop at 1 lt 1 2V Load impedance minimum 48 Ohms Response time 2 1 2 ms Frequency of switching to inductive load 0 5 LI Hz Paralleling of outputs Yes maximum of 2 Compatibility with IEC 1131 2 DC
200. ectromagnet discharge time lt L R 3 Fit a fuse to the 48 V pre actuator supply 4 Excluding load current 5 Nb number of outputs at 1 158 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08T31 Connecting the TSX DSY 08T31 module At a Glance The TSX DSY 08T31 module comprises 8 x 48 VDC protected transistor output channels piAs Loy This module is equipped with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to be connected Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an output is shown below i i Current ransil ii F Monitoring Transil 1 I l I i i i I I i i Control Q n Pre actuator l I l i Voltage Solid state Monitoring switch Module Output 35010512 07 2011 159 TSX DSY 08T31 Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre actuators Outputs 1 Fup 48 VDC FU2 10 A quick blow fuse 160 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 16T2 Discrete output module 18 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DSY 16T2 module its characteristics and its connection to the different pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Present
201. ed to reactivate the output if no fault remains at its terminals Reset is defined by a group of 8 channels It has no effect on an inactive channel or channel without a fault Procedure The following table shows the procedure for reactivating tripped outputs Step Action 1 Access the module s debugging screen 2 For the chosen group of channels click on the Reactivate button situated in the General parameters field 456 35010512 07 2011 Debugging of discrete modules Applied outputs of a discrete module At a Glance This check red Stop LED lit informs the user that a given group of output channels is not correctly applied by the PLC fallback status The possible causes are e processor fault e rack fault e inter rack link fault 35010512 07 2011 457 Debugging of discrete modules 458 35010512 07 2011 Diagnostic of discrete modules 37 Aim of this Section This section describes the Diagnostic aspect in the implementation of the discrete specific application What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page How to access the Diagnostics function of a discrete module 460 How to access the Channel Diagnostics function of a discrete module 462 35010512 07 2011 459 Diagnostic of discrete modules How to access the Diagnostics function of a discrete module At a Glance The Module diagnostics modul
202. ed when the feedback loop between terminals Y1 and Y2 is closed AND when there is a reactivation request S24 between terminals S33 and S34 Terminals Y3 Y4 allow one to choose whether or not this reactivation is to be monitored e When Y3 Y4 is open the outputs are activated recommended when the PB is pressed then released falling edge on S34 e When Y3 Y4 is closed the outputs are immediately activated when the PB is pressed NOTE e The shunt between terminals Y3 Y4 must be as short as possible e Do not connect anything else to these terminals Ashunt on both Y3 Y4 and S33 S34 allows the outputs to be activated automatically as soon as the two input channels are closed A de synchronization time of 400 ms is allowed 35010512 07 2011 351 Implementing safety modules Safety output The TSX PAY 262 module features two outputs wired between terminals 13 14 and 23 24 these two outputs can be supplied independently The TSX PAY 282 module features four outputs wired between terminals 13 14 23 24 33 34 and 43 44 these outputs are grouped together in pairs and each pair can be supplied independently The relays with guided contacts or switches connected upstream from the outputs must be inserted in the feedback loop between terminals Y1 and Y2 The device may only be switched on if those relays with safety related functions which received a stop order have been deactivated The feedback loop must be closed before an
203. eflex Discrete Module 468 Description of the reflex function configuration editor 469 How to assign and then configure a reflex function 471 How to set the configuration parameters of a reflex function 472 How to associate an event with a virtual output 473 35010512 07 2011 467 Installation of the discrete reflex module Configuration of the Reflex Discrete Module Introduction The TSX DMY 28RFK reflex discrete module specifies the parameters of the standard discrete inputs outputs see page 412 However it has its own specific parameters such as e the assignment for a given output channel of a reflex function see page 471 e the association of an event with a virtual output see page 473 A reflex function thus assigned to a given channel must in turn be configured and have its internal parameters adjusted see page 472 Illustration The following screen shows a few examples of function assignments for a given channel 16E 24VCC 12S REFLEX O Supply monitoring Reset Programmed gent Channela Config Inputs Config Outputs t lt Channel 16 ree Ohare 24 Desc value Functions Ta 16 Fallbac Direct pe 17 Falback0 Combinational LADDER Discrete output Fallbac Tacks Fallbac Fallbac TIMER idle Fallbac Fallbac Fallbac D
204. elay output contact protection 20 00 eee 175 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R5 module 176 Connecting the TSX DSY 08R5 module 2 0005 178 Chapter 21 TSX DSY 08R4D Discrete output module 181 Presentation of the TSX DSY 08R4D module 182 Fuse protection miri ierte reperi det doped ba ee ceed elec de nA 183 Connecting the TSX DSY 08R4D module 00 02 eee 184 Characteristics of the TSX DSY O8R4D module 186 Chapter 22 TSX DSY 08R5A Discrete output module 189 Presentation of the TSX DSY O8R5A module 5 190 Characteristics of the TSX DSY O8R5A module 191 Connecting the TSX DSY O8R5A module 2 0 2 193 35010512 07 2011 5 Chapter 23 Chapter 24 Chapter 25 Chapter 26 Chapter 27 Chapter 28 Chapter 29 Chapter 30 Chapter 31 31 1 TSX DSY 16R5 Discrete output module Presentation of the TSX DSY 16R5 module 05 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16R5 module 05 Connecting the TSX DSY 16R5 module 20000055 TSX DSY 08S5 Discrete output module Presentation of the TSX DSY 08S5 module 005 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08S5 module Connecting the TSX DSY 08S5 module 0020000 TSX DSY 16S5 Discrete output module
205. er This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DEY 16A5 module 110 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A5 module 111 Connecting the TSX DEY 16A5 module 113 35010512 07 2011 109 TSX DEY 16A5 Presentation of the TSX DEY 16A5 module General The TSX DEY 16A5 module The TSX DEY 16A5 module is a 200 240 VAC 16 channel terminal block Discrete input module 110 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A5 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A5 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A5 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A5 module The TSX DEY 16A5 module 200 240 VAC alternating voltage inputs Nominal input values Voltage 200 240 VAC Current 15 mA Frequency 50 60 Hz Threshold input values at 1 Voltage 2159 V Current 26 mA for U 159 V at 0 Voltage lt 40 V Current 4 mA Frequency 47 63 HZ Sensor supply 170 264 V Peak current at activation 300 mA at nominal U Input impedance at nominal U 20 kOhms Response time Activation 10 ms Deactivation 20 ms IEC 1131 2 compliance type 1 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength Input ground or Input 2000 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min internal
206. eration validation Y3 Y4 Choice of monitoring mode 121 to S232 Input channel contact 01 to 112 Input channel contact A1 A2 e xternal 24 VDC supply B1 Selection of double or single contact wiring 13 14 23 24 Safety outputs shared on TSX PAY 262 module F1 F2 and F3 1 A 4 A and 4 A gL fuse respectively 35010512 07 2011 369 Implementing safety modules The TSX CPP 301 cable General The TSX CPP 301 cable is a non protected multiconductor cable made up of 32 conductors 22 gauge 7 threads One of its ends is fitted with an unremovable male HD 44 pin Sub D connector with the other made up of semi stripped free threads The sheath has been cut but the conductor is not stripped The cable is 3 m long Connections The following table shows the TSX CPP 301 cable s markings Each thread is marked according to a color code as per EN47100 The first color denotes the basic color of the conductor isolator with the second denoting the color of the printed ring Marking Sub D DIN 47100 color Marking Sub D DIN 47100 color connector pin connector pin A1 16 Yellow Brown S122 8131 32 White Blue A2 Y4 30 White Pink 132 141 3 Green B1 17 White Gray 8142 8151 34 White Red S01 31 Pink Brown 152 S161 5 Gray 02 S11 2 Brown 162 S171 36 White Black 12 S21 33 Brown Blue 172 S181 7 Blue 22 S31 4 Yellow 182 S191 38 Gray Green 32 S41 35 Brown Red 192 S201 9 Black
207. erence Outputs store the orders given by the processor in order to control pre actuators via decoupling and amplification circuits 20 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general overview Physical description of Discrete modules with screw terminal block connection At a Glance Illustration Elements The following is a physical description of Discrete I O modules with screw terminal block connection The I O modules are housed in plastic cases which provide IP20 protection for all the electronic parts Zh is flrs VERRIER DYU al The following table describes the different elements of the Discrete I O modules with screw terminal block connection Number Description 1 Module display and diagnostics block 2 Removable screw terminal block for directly connecting I Os to the sensors and pre actuators Reference TSX BLY 01 Certain output modules contain integrated fuses which are accessible from the front when the terminal block is removed Swing door for access to the block s screws and also acting as a marking label display area 4 Rotating base comprising the locating device NOTE the terminal blocks are supplied separately 35010512 07 2011 21 Discrete general overview Physical description of Discrete modules with HE10 connectors At a Glance The following is a physical description of Discrete I O modu
208. eristics of the TSX DEY 16A3 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A3 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A3 module The TSX DEY 16A3 module 48 VAC alternating voltage inputs Nominal input values Voltage 48 VAC Current 16 mA Frequency 50 60 Hz Threshold input values at 1 Voltage 229V Current 2 6 mA for U 29 V at 0 Voltage lt 10 V Current lt 4 mA Frequency 47 63 HZ Sensor supply 40 52 V Peak current at activation 80 mA at nominal U Input impedance at nominal U 3 2 kOhms Response time Activation 10 ms Deactivation 20 ms IEC 1131 2 compliance type 2 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength Input ground or Input 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min internal logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input Capacitive Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 36 V Error lt 24V Check response time on appearance 20 ms lt T lt 50 ms on disappearance 5ms lt T lt 15ms 5 V consumption typical 80 mA maximum 90 mA 35010512 07 2011 99 TSX DEY 16A3 Sensor supply consumption 1 typical 16 mA 16 x Nb mA maximum 20 mA 16 x Nb mA Dissipated power
209. et demagnetization circuits Electromagnet discharge time lt L R 3 Fit a 2 A fuse to the 24 V pre actuator supply 1 per connector 4 Excluding load current 5 Nb number of outputs at 1 222 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 32T2K Connecting the TSX DSY 32T2K module At a Glance Circuit diagram The TSX DSY 32T2K module comprises 32 positive logic transistor output channels for direct current i gt N Cei 4 a my a im een a This module is fitted with 2 male HE10 connectors e connector A for outputs 0 to 15 e connector B for outputs 16 to 31 The circuit diagram for an output is shown below See f 24 VDC fuse l E transil l Ea nN aT l Output 0 at n l Solid state L l Load i switch op i 0V Module Pre actuator 35010512 07 2011 223 TSX DSY 32T2K Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators
210. ete module Discrete output module Discrete module Number of 8 outputs 16 outputs channels Range 12 24 VDC or 24 240 VAC 24 130 VDC 24 48 VDC or 12 24 VDC or 24 240 VAC 24 240 VAC Insulation Outputs insulated between contact and earth Current 3A 5A 3A IEC 1131 2 Yes compliance Protection No protection Interchangeable fuse protection No protection Output reset in the event of fault detection reactivation once fuse is replaced Fallback Configurable output fallback Terminal block Automatic output cut off device on unlocking of terminal blocks unlocking Logic Positive negative Connections Screw terminal block TSXeereference DSY 08R5 DSY 08R4D DSY 08R5A DSY 16R5 number 26 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general overview Catalog The following table provides a catalog of bidirectional triode thyristor Discrete output modules with screw terminal block connection Type of module Bidirectional triode thyristor outputs with screw terminal block connection Illustration Discrete output module Discrete output module Discrete output module Number of 8 outputs 16 outputs channels Range 48 240 VAC 24 120 VAC Insulation Insulated outputs Current 2A 1A IEC 1131 2 Yes compliance Protection Interchangeable fuse protection Outputs not protected against short circuits or overloads Fireproof protection via non interchangeable fuses Fallbac
211. eways These various cables must routed at least 100 mm apart 35010512 07 2011 43 Discrete general implementation rules Means of Connecting Discrete I O Modules Connecting Screw Terminal Block Modules At a Glance Discrete I O module terminal blocks feature an automatic code transfer device activated on first use This allows fitting errors to be avoided when replacing a module This coding guarantees electrical compatibility by module type Description of the screw terminal block Every terminal block can receive bare wires or wires with terminations or spade terminals The capacity of each terminal is e minimum 1 x 0 2 mm wire AWG 24 without termination e maximum 1 x 2 mm wire without termination or 1 x 1 5 mm with termination Illustration of the termination and the spade terminal i no 1 5 5 mm maximum The maximum capacity of the terminal block is 16 x 1 mm wires AWG 4 x 1 5 mm wires AWG Screw clamps come with slots for the following types of screwdriver e Pozidriv No 1 e 5mm diameter flat head Screw connection terminal blocks feature captive screws On the supplied blocks these screws are not tightened NOTE the maximum torque for tightening connection terminal block screws is 0 8 N m NOTE Screw terminal blocks must be engaged or disengaged with sensor and pre actuator voltage switched off 44 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general implementation rules Th
212. f the Discrete Module Configuration Screen At a Glance The configuration screen is a graphic tool designed for configuring see Unity Pro Operating Modes a module selected in a rack It displays the parameters defined for this modules channels and allows you to modify them in offline mode and online mode function available for Unity Pro versions greater than 1 0 It also provides access to modification and debug screens the latter in online mode only NOTE It is not possible to configure a module by programming using direct language objects kw these words are accessible in read only format 404 35010512 07 2011 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application Illustration This screen enables the display and modification of parameters in offline mode as well as debug in online mode MM 0 2 TSX DSY 1672 16Q 24VDC 0 5A SRC T BLK oce 2 Run Err 10 f TSX DSY 1672 3 a Configuration Debugging ees exces Fallback value anne T F Function 0 1 Discrete outputs 4 Task 0 x MAST 0 z 0 z Supply Monitoring 0 si 0 E 4 Reactivate 0 x Programmed 0 x Fallback mode 5 F Fallback 6 E 0 0 X 35010512 07 2011 405 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application Description The next table shows the various elements of the configuration screen and their functions Address Element Function
213. f the TSX DEY 16D2 module 74 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16D2 module 75 Temperature downgrading for the Discrete I O modules 77 Connecting the TSX DEY 16D2 module 5 20055 79 TSX DEY 16D3 Discrete input module 81 Presentation of the TSX DEY 16D3 module 82 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16D3 module 83 Connecting the TSX DEY 16D3 module 20055 85 TSX DEY 16A2 Discrete input module 87 Presentation of the TSX DEY 16A2 module 88 Characteristics of the alternating voltage TSX DEY 16A2 module 89 Characteristics of the 24 VDC negative logic TSX DEY 16A2 module 91 Connecting the alternating voltage TSX DEY 16A2 module 93 Connecting the 24 VDC negative logic TSX DEY 16A2 module 95 TSX DEY 16A3 Discrete input module 97 Presentation of the TSX DEY 16A3 module 98 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A3 module 99 Connecting the TSX DEY 16A3 module 000 eae 101 TSX DEY 16A4 Discrete input module 103 Presentation of the TSX DEY 16A4 module 104 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16A4 module 105 Connecting the TSX DEY 16A4 module 0 00005 107 TSX DEY 16A5 Discrete input module 109 Presentation of th
214. f the supply positive logic inputs Terminals 200 201 202 and 203 are linked to the polarity Connecting the common for pre actuators e several terminals linked to the polarity 3 4 200 202 and 203 allow sharing in groups of 4 or 2 channels positive logic outputs 35010512 07 2011 281 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 11 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H16R50 Connection Base Sensor and Actuator Connections on the ABE 7H16R50 Base At a Glance This is an overview of the sensor and actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 base NOTE The base is manufactured with a general purpose fast blow fuse rated 6 3 A To guarantee optimum protection this fuse should be rated according to the application connection to input or output functions and the maximum current allowable in the base Type and rating of fuse to be fitted to the base e input functions 0 5A fast blow e output functions 2A fast blow on the ABE 7H16R50 base Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC OVDG ABE H16R50 H H 6 Digital I O 2Amax u O N w E EE jap wn pao 2 N GO ro Fuse 282 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Connections for input and output functions
215. flex discrete module Operating principle The TSX DMY 28RFK module works independently from the PLC task It has its own inputs outputs 161 120 and therefore guarantees a reaction time of less than 1 ms At the same time but at the rate of the PLC task allocated to them the variables within the module are exchanged with the PLC processor These variables are e the image bits of the state of the physical inputs of the module l e the image bits of the state of the physical and auxiliary outputs of the module l e the command bits of the module s outputs Q Operating principle The following illustration summarizes the operating principle of the reflex discrete module Reaction time lt 1 ms TSX DM 28 RFK module Inputs Outputs A e a j Reflex functions poet H 41 lr m c 0 to 15 lr m c 16 to 31 lr m c 1 16 to 31 PLC task y Acquisition Processing Updat l Heale J Or m c 466 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module 38 2 Configuration of the reflex discrete module Aim of this sub section This sub section shows the specific features associated with the configuration of a reflex discrete module What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Configuration of the R
216. fore time periods ni have elapsed e the oscillation stops at the low status of outputx input x Aux changes to 0 The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the burst function block ti ti x Aux 35010512 07 2011 505 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block PWM Pulse Width Modulation Role This function is used to generate a fixed period periodic signal t1i with a variable duty cycle t2i t1i Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration E Block s input x Block s physical output a PWM generation Out x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output control output Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the PWM function block Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input E e oscillation of output x control input x Aux changes to 1 2 On the low status of input E e the oscillation of output x stops at its low status control input x Aux changes to 0 Note if t2i high status of period t1i is higher than or equal to tli output x continually keeps the high status Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the PMW function block E I x
217. g 55 filtering discrete inputs TSXDEY16FK 117 TSXDMY28FK 117 TSXDMY28RFK 117 filtering parameters 417 forcing 453 fusing 183 H HE10 connectors 37 L latching discrete inputs TSXDEY16FK 178 TSXDMY28FK 118 M masking 455 Modification of values using MOD_PARAM Reflex discrete specific application 527 P parameters settings 422 protecting relay contacts TSXDSY08R5 175 TSXDSY16R5 175 R reactivating discrete outputs 419 456 reflex functions 475 TSXDMY28RFK 241 reflex modules configuring 467 function parameters 415 TSXDMY28RFK 463 relays 335 342 S safety modules 344 diagnostics 379 DIS_IN_GEN 432 DIS_IN_STD 433 434 T_DIS_OUT_GEN 439 T_DIS_OUT_REFLEX 443 444 T_DIS_OUT_STD 440 441 task parameter 413 TELEFAST 2 249 temperature derating 77 terminal blocks connecting 44 TSX CPP 301 Connnection to TSX PAY 292 370 TSXDEYO8D2 67 68 69 TSXDEY16A2 87 88 89 91 TSXDEY16A3 97 98 99 TSXDEY16A4 103 104 105 TSXDEY16A5 109 110 111 TSXDEY16D2 73 74 75 TSXDEY16D3 81 82 83 TSXDEY16FK 115 116 121 TSXDEY32D2K 125 126 127 TSXDEY32D3K 131 132 133 TSXDEY64D2K 137 138 139 TSXDMY28FK 231 232 233 TSXDMY28RFK 239 240 242 TSXDSYO8R4D 181 182 186 TSXDSYO8R85 173 174 176 T T_DIS_EVT 436 437 TL TA 526 35010512 07 2011 Index TSXDSYO8R5A 189 190 191 TSXDSY08S5 201 202 203 TSXDSYO8T2 143 144 145 TSXDSY08T22
218. g Reset Programmed 29v Direct Combinational 3lv Combinational For the channel concerned select the cell corresponding to the parameter to be entered 4 Enter the parameter Confirm the modification with the Edit Validate menu command 472 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module How to associate an event with a virtual output Introduction Virtual outputs are not the module s physical outputs but they act on the internal status bits of the module and can be associated with events A virtual output can therefore trigger an event task of the PLC processor Properties of event outputs Performance The possible properties of event processing are e Normal no event associated with the channel e channel by channel event processing e Event triggered on a rising edge RE e Event triggered on falling edge FE e Event triggered on rising and falling edges If both transition types are selected on one channel only one event number is assigned to the channel Event inputs are assigned an Evti processing number These numbers range from e Oto 31 for TSX 571 processors e 0 to 63 for TSX 572 TSX 573 TSX 574 TSX PCI 572 TSX PCI 574 and TSX 575 processors The highest priority event processing Evti is number 0 This can only be assigned to channel 0 NOTE The default event number is the first available in the list A number entered manually outside the tole
219. ge overflow Yes by integrated breakdown diode Against polarity inversions Yes by suppressor Switching frequency on inductive load lt 0 6LI2 Error detection report Yes Voltage assigned to insulation Input output 300 V Voltage assigned to shock resistance 1 2 50 Input output 2 5 kV 35010512 07 2011 311 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 21 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T210 P16T210 connection bases Actuator connections on ABE 7R16T210 P16T210 electromechanical or static output relay bases size 10 mm At a Glance This is a description of the actuator connections on e TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T210 base 16 relay outputs 1 F potential free contact with electromagnetic relay e TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T210 base 16 relay outputs 1 F potential free contact relay not provided Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC OVDG plo 5 Fhse elAmax ABE P16T210 16 Relay Outputs ao fala lala e a a a ato att azl aia ata ats tt A Me R SSSSESSSSSSESSSESS NSSSSSSHESCVIS OPIS L Hs 200 215 Dd mM 312
220. h 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input current sink Paralleling of inputs 1 yes Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 36 V Error lt 24V Check response time on appearance 1ms lt T lt 3ms on disappearance 8 ms lt T lt 30 ms 5 V consumption typical 80 mA maximum 90 mA Sensor supply consumption 2 typical 25 mA 7 x Nb mA maximum 33 mA 7 x Nb mA Dissipated power 2 1 W 0 3 x Nb W 35010512 07 2011 83 TSX DEY 16D3 Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 This characteristic is used to connect several inputs to the same module in parallel or to different modules for input redundancy 2 Nb number of channels at 1 84 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16D3 Connecting the TSX DEY 16D3 module At a Glance The TSX DEY 16D3 module comprises 16 x 48 VDC inputs with type 2 positive logic fe LEE ELELLLG This module is fitted with a removable connection terminal block for the connection of inputs Principle Diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below Sensor supply and Fuse voltage monitoring Sensor Input I 0 n Entry hei S aca j Module 35010512 07 2011 85 TSX DEY 16D3
221. hange that applies to discrete input and reflex input modules It regroups word type objects which bits have a particular meaning These objects are explained in detail below Example of declaring a variable IODDT_VARI1 of type T DIS _INT_ STD NOTE Generally bit meaning is provided for state 1 of that bit In specific cases each bit state is explained NOTE Not all bits are used Explicit exchange execution indicators EXCH_STS The following table shows exchange control bit meanings for channel EXCH_STS MWr m c 0 Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number STS_IN_ PROGR BOOL R Status words reading for the channel in progress MWr m c 0 0 CMD_IN_PROGR BOOL R Command parameters exchange in progress MWr m c 0 1 Explicit exchange report EXCH_RPT The table below shows EXCH RPT MWr m c 1 report bit meanings Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number STS_ERR BOOL R Channel status word reading error 1 failure MWr m c 1 0 CMD_ERR BOOL R Error during command parameter exchange MWr m c 1 1 1 failure Standard channel faults CH_FLT The table below shows the CH_FLT MWr m c 2 status word bit meanings The reading is performed by aREAD STS IODDT_ VAR1 Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number TRIP BOOL R External error Tripped MWr m c 2 0 FUSE BOOL R External error Fuse MWr m c 2 1
222. hows the general characteristics of the TSX DMY 28RFK module outputs The TSX DMY 28RFK module 24 VDC positive logic transistor outputs Nominal values Voltage 24 VDC Current 0 5A Threshold values 1 Voltage including ripple 19 30 V 34 V possible for 1 hour every 24 hours Current channel 0 625 A Current module 4A Power of tungsten filament lamp Maximum 6W Leakage current at 0 lt 1mA Voltage drop at 1 lt 1 2V Load impedance minimum 48 Ohms Response time 2 0 6 ms Frequency of switching to inductive load 0 5 LI2 Hz Paralleling of outputs Yes maximum of 2 Compatibility with IEC 1131 2 DC inputs Yes type 1 and type 2 Built in protection against over voltage Yes by Transil diode against inversions Yes by inverted diode 3 against short circuits and overloads Yes by current limiter and electric circuit breaker 1 5 In lt Id lt 2 In Pre actuator voltage check threshold OK gt 18V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance T lt 4ms on disappearance T lt 30 ms 35010512 07 2011 243 TSX DMY 28RFK 24 V pre actuator consumption 4 typical 40 mA maximum 60 mA Dissipated power 5 2 4 W 0 75 x Nb W Dielectric strength Output ground or 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Output internal logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC
223. ilures hour Mother board 2 4 x 10 failures hour 396 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Input characteristics The following table shows the characteristics of the TSX PAY 282 module inputs No of safety channels 12 single or double ES PBs Reactivation On button Yes S33 S34 Single or double ES PB selection Yes with external shunt B1 Feedback loop Yes Y1 Y2 Reactivation input monitoring Yes with external shunt Y3 Y4 Call current 0 5A 1ms Input Ground insulation 500 V actual 50 60 Hz 1 min Output characteristics The following table shows the characteristics of the TSX PAY 282 module outputs Potential reference No potential Number and type of circuits 4 x normally open with shared supply DIN EN 60947 5 1 cut off power AC15 C300 1800 VA call 180 VA maintained DC13 24 V 2 5 A L R 100 ms Voltage 19 250 VAC 17 127 VDC Outputs protected by fuses compliant with 4AgL EN VDE 0660 section 200 and IEC 947 5 1 Maximum thermal current 2 5A Minimum current and voltage 30 mA and 24 VDC ES request response time lt 10 ms Insulation Output Weight 300 V insulation voltage compliant with VDE 0110 section 1 Test voltage 2000 V actual 50 60 Hz 1 min Safety System Ground 300 V actual Mechanical durability 10 maneuvers Electrical durability 10 maneuvers depending on
224. inal Block Connections 35 Identification of Discrete I O Modules with HE10 Connectors 37 Choice of direct current power supply for sensors and pre actuators associated 39 with Discrete I O modules Precautions and General Rules for Wiring with Discrete I O Modules 40 Means of Connecting Discrete I O Modules Connecting Screw Terminal Block 44 Modules Connecting Discrete I O Modules HE10 Connector Modules 46 Connecting Discrete I O Modules to TELEFAST Interfaces Using an HE10 48 Connector Sensor Input Compatibility and Pre Actuator Output Compatibility 50 35010512 07 2011 31 Discrete general implementation rules Fitting of Discrete I O Modules At a Glance All Premium Discrete I O modules are of standard format Fitting operations installation assembly and disassembly are described below Installation The Discrete I O modules powered by the rack bus can either be positioned on the standard rack or on an extendable rack They can be safely handled without turning off the rack power supply The diagram below shows Discrete I O modules installed in the rack Standard rack Extendable rack LJE E AD it Tete Bae i a L stor Connector modules Terminal block modules 32 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general implementation rules Assembly Disassembly The following table
225. ine mode Instructions The following table shows how to define parameters assigned to event inputs Step Action 1 Open the desired module configuration screen 2 Select the desired channel group 3 Click in the cell of the Function column of the channel to be configured Result A drop down menu appears 35010512 07 2011 415 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application Step Action 4 Click on the drop down menu arrow Result The Channel properties screen appears Channel 6 parameters Xx Function Normal Latching to status 0 Latching to status 1 Event processing Rising E Faling er fi al Select the desired function Enter the event number Evt Repeat the operation for each channel to be configured from step 3 On oO a Confirm the modification with the Edit Validate menu command 416 35010512 07 2011 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application How to Modify the Filtering Parameter of a Discrete Input Module At a Glance This parameter defines the filtering period for the channel selected The default values are 0 1 to 7 5 ms in 0 5 ms increments NOTE Module filtering modification is possible in online mode function available for Unity Pro versions greater than 1 0 Procedure The following table shows how to define the Filtering parameter Step Action
226. ing is configured for negative transition lWr m c 0 1 Control bit The following table presents the CMD_OUT Qr m c control bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number CMD_OUT EBOOL R W Indicate that c channel is active Qr m c Event flag EVT_MASK The following table presents the 1 EVT_MASK QWr m c 0 0 bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number EVT_MASK BOOL R W Enables you to mask unmask the event assigned to the channel QWr m c 0 0 35010512 07 2011 443 Language Objects Details for T_DIS_OUT_REFLEX Type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange At a Glance This section shows the IODDT of type T DIS OUT REFLEX explicit exchange objects that apply to Discrete reflex output modules It regroups word type objects which bits have a particular meaning These objects are explained in detail below Example of declaring a variable IODDT_ VARI of type T DIS_OUT_ REFLEX NOTE Generally bit meaning is provided for state 1 of that bit In specific cases each bit state is explained NOTE Not all bits are used Explicit exchange execution indicators EXCH_STS The following table shows exchange control bit meanings for channel EXCH_STS MWr m c 0 Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number STS_IN_ PROGR BOOL R Status word
227. ing operation e Direct 0 block selected e Direct 1 block not selected output x takes the value of E x Monostable s physical output x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output Illustration This table describes the different operating phases of the 2 value monostable Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input E e a time out corresponding to the status of input Sel is launched time base of 0 1ms outputs x and x Aux change to 1 When the time out is over the x and x Aux outputs change to 0 492 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the monostable with time delay function block E Sel i t2i a tti gt x x Aux String operation It is possible to increase the number of time outs which can be selected by stringing together several blocks with the x output of one forming the E input of the next Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input E of the first block the time out is launched corresponding to e the block whose Direct input is at 0 e the status of the Sel input outputs x and x Aux change to 1 Note Two blocks must not simultaneously have their Direct inputs set to 0 2 When the time out is over the x and x Aux outputs change to 0 No
228. inputs Yes type 1 and type2 Built in protection against over voltage Yes by Transil diode against inversions Yes by inverted diode 3 against short circuits and overloads Yes by current limiter and electric circuit breaker 1 5 In lt Id lt 2 In Pre actuator voltage check threshold OK gt 18 V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance T lt 4ms on disappearance T lt 30 ms 5 V consumption typical 55 mA maximum 65 mA 24 V pre actuator consumption 4 typical 30 mA maximum 40 mA Dissipated power 5 1 W 0 75 x Nb W 35010512 07 2011 145 TSX DSY 08T2 Dielectric strength Output ground or Output 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min internal logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of max module current Legend 1 For U lt 30 V or 34 V 2 All the outputs are equipped with fast electromagnet demagnetization circuits Electromagnet discharge time lt L R 3 Fit a fuse to the 24 V pre actuator supply 4 Excluding load current 5 Nb number of outputs at 1 146 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08T2 Connecting the TSX DSY 08T2 module At a Glance The TSX DSY 08T2 module comprises 8 x 24 VDC protected transistor output channels This module is equipped
229. inter channel short circuits on the ES PBs or PSs The external supply is protected in the event of this happening and an error is indicated on the safety system In order to guarantee the safety function it is compulsory to use the following e on input e double contact ES PBs or PSs e the NF contacts of the guided contact auxiliary relays in the feedback loop e on output e two or four guided contact auxiliary relays e a4AgL output protection fuse F2 e on the external module supply e a 1A gL protection fuse F1 35010512 07 2011 361 Implementing safety modules Protection of safety outputs Output voltages can reach 230 VAC or 127 VDC Outputs are not protected inside the module though GMOV type for a continual load or RC cell type for an alternating load protection is applied directly to the terminals of the load in use These protective measures must be adapted to the load The use of guided contact auxiliary relays and the feedback loop wiring then make it possible to detect a safety output short circuit A 4 A gL quick blow fuse is located in the auxiliary supply circuit to protect the module s safety relay contacts and the connected loads this fuse is identical to that used in PREVENTA modules The fuse F2 located on the safety outputs provides protection against short circuits and overloads This protection avoids the melting of the safety relay contacts in TSX PAY 2 2 modules 362 3501
230. ion Indicators for an Explicit Exchange EXCH_STS Phase 1 Sending data by using the WRITE PARAM instruction PLC memory Status parameters Command parameters Adjustment parameters When the instruction is scanned by the PLC processor the Exchange in progress bit is set to 1 in SMWr m c VO module memory or integrated specific application function memory Status parameters Command parameters c p Adjustment parameters Phase 2 Analysis of the data by the I O module and report PLC memory Status parameters Command parameters Adjustment parameters VO module memory or integrated specific application function memory Status parameters Command parameters Adjustment parameters When the data is exchanged between the PLC memory and the module acknowledgement by the module is managed by the ADJ_ ERR bit SMWr m c 1 2 This bit makes the following reports e 0 correct exchange e 1 faulty exchange NOTE There is no adjustment parameter at module level The table below shows the control bits of the explicit exchanges EXCH_STS SMWr m c 0 Standard symbol Type Access_ Meaning Address STS_IN_PROGR BOOL R Reading of channel status MWr m c 0 0 words in progress CMD_IN_PROGR BOOL R Command parameters MWr m c 0 1 exchange in progress 350105
231. ion of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 64T2K module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 64T2K module The TSX DSY 64T2K module 24 VDC positive logic transistor outputs Nominal values Voltage 24 VDC Current 0 1A Threshold values 1 Voltage including ripple 19 30 V 34 V possible for 1 hour every 24 hours Current channel 0 125A Current module 5A Power of tungsten filament lamp Maximum 1 2W Leakage current at 0 lt 0 1 mA for U 30 V Voltage drop at 1 lt 1 5 V for 0 1 A Load impedance minimum 220 Ohms Response time 2 1 2 ms Frequency of switching to inductive load 0 5 LI2 Hz Paralleling of outputs Yes maximum of 3 Compatibility with IEC 1131 2 DC inputs Yes type 1 and type 2 Built in protection against over voltage Yes by Transil diode against inversions Yes by inverted diode 3 against short circuits and overloads Yes by current limiter and electric circuit breaker 0 125 A lt Id lt 0 185 A Pre actuator voltage check threshold OK gt 18 V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance T lt 4ms on disappearance T lt 30 ms 5 V consumption typical 135 mA maximum 175 mA 24 V pre actuator consumption 4 typical 60 mA maximum 80 mA 35010512 07 2011 227 TSX DSY 64T2K Dissipated
232. ious phases of installation with the processor Phase Description Mode Declaration of variables Declaration of ODDT type variables for the application specific modules Offline 1 and variables of the project Programming Project programming Offline 1 Configuration Declaration of modules Offline Module channel configuration Entry of configuration parameters Association Association of IODDTs with the channels configured variable editor Offline 1 Generation Project generation analysis and editing of links Offline Transfer Transfer project to PLC Online Adjustment Debugging Project debugging from debug screens animation tables Online Modifying the program and adjustment parameters 35010512 07 2011 401 General Information the project Phase Description Mode Documentation Building documentation file and printing miscellaneous information relating Online 1 to the project Operation Diagnostic Displaying miscellaneous information necessary for supervisory control of Online Diagnostic of project and modules Key 1 These various phases can also be performed in the other mode Implementation Phases with Simulator The following table shows the various phases of installation with the simulator Phase Description Mode Declaration of variables Declaration of IODDT type
233. ipated power 2 1 2 W 0 1 x Nb W Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 This characteristic is used to connect several inputs to the same module in parallel or to different modules for input redundancy 2 Nb number of channels at 1 General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DMY 28FK module outputs The TSX DMY 28FK module 24 VDC positive logic transistor outputs Nominal values Voltage 24 VDC Current 0 5A Threshold values 1 Voltage including ripple 19 30 V 34 V possible for 1 hour every 24 hours Current channel 0 625 A Current module 4A Power of tungsten filament lamp Maximum 6W Leakage current at 0 lt 1mA Voltage drop at 1 lt 12V Load impedance minimum 48 Ohms Response time 2 0 6 ms Frequency of switching to inductive load 0 5 LI2 Hz Paralleling of outputs Yes maximum of 2 Compatibility with IEC 1131 2 DC inputs Yes type 1 and type 2 Built in protection against over voltage Yes by Transil diode against inversions Yes by inverted diode 3 against short circuits and overloads Yes by current limiter and electric circuit breaker 1 5 In lt Id lt 2 In Pre actuator voltage check threshold OK gt 18V Error lt 14V Ch
234. irect Direct Direct Direct O o 5o 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 959 9 9 9 9 z Direct REFEEVT2 zi Combinational REEVT3 z Combinational RE EVT 4 468 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Description of the reflex function configuration editor At a Glance The reflex function configuration editor consists of a grid allowing you to choose the function block and to enter graphic objects relating to the sequential logic of the block Illustration The following illustration shows the configuration zone of a reflex function block _E_ TIMER in operation f OUT 26 ti 0 OUT 25 A LL ELI ELI LEE ILI LIL Ld Pee MS ED a Be og A 5 6 Description The following table shows the various parts of the configuration zone Address Function 1 Columns allowing contacts to be entered with their associated language object 2 Columns allowing horizontal and vertical links to be entered between the contacts 3 Column allowing the inputs of function blocks to be set to 1 or linked with the combinational block Column displaying the inputs relating to the function block selected Column e displaying the type of internal parameter used by the block making it possible to select the chosen reflex function 6 Column allowing the type of output coil to be entered
235. is effective on reopening of the PB so as to avoid auto operation in the 33 case of PB malfunction permanently PB H laced 6 S34 closed Y3 Y4 open __ TELEFAST terminal block Without Reactivation button monitoring In this case reactivation takes place on O closing the PB pe p10 33 L 6 534 Y3 Y4 TELEFAST terminal block 376 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Safety outputs General Outputs are wired to the 6 point screw terminal block for both the TSX PAY 262 and TSX PAY 282 modules TSX PAY 262 module Wiring diagram for TSX PAY 262 mi 13 ma G lt 1 AS a o a a IUJ j 13 and 23 Independent supply input 14 and 24 Safety outputs TSX PAY 282 module Wiring diagram for TSX PAY 282 T 1323 A 13 28 14 Ej 14 24 G 24 33 43 S eA aa on a 34 LO i a iy H ALa 13 23 and 33 43 Independent supply input 14 24 34 and 44 Safety outputs NOTE Cross section of wires e with termination 2 x 1 mm wires or 1 x 1 5 mm wire e without termination 1 x 2 5 mm wire 35010512 07 2011 377 Implementing safety modules Modules in series Introduction For applications using over 12 single or double contact inputs it is possible to use several TSX PAY 2 2 modules No matter how the safety system is wired the following must be ap
236. iscrete mixed I O module Number of channels 16 fast inputs 16 fast inputs 12 outputs 16 event outputs Inputs Range 24 VDC Insulation Insulated inputs IEC 1131 2 compliance Type 1 Logic Positive Proximity sensor 2 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 Programmable filtering Yes 0 1 7 5 ms in 0 5 ms steps Latching Yes Event Yes Outputs Range 24 VDC Insulation Insulated outputs Current O 5A IEC 1131 2 compliance Yes Protection Outputs protected against short circuits and overloads with automatic or controlled reactivation and with fast electromagnet demagnetization circuit Fallback Configurable output fallback Permanent monitoring of output commands and reset of outputs in the event of internal fault detection Logic Positive Response time 0 6 ms Connections HE10 connectors TSXee reference number DMY 28FK DMY 28RFK 35010512 07 2011 29 Discrete general overview 30 35010512 07 2011 General rules for implementing Discrete I O modules Overview This chapter presents the general rules for implementing Discrete I O modules What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Fitting of Discrete I O Modules 32 Fitting a screw terminal block to a Discrete I O module 34 Identification of Discrete I O Modules with Screw Term
237. istor output module for direct current positive logic 168 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 16T3 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 16T3 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 16T3 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 16T3 module The TSX DSY 16T3 module 48 VDC positive logic transistor outputs Nominal values Voltage 48 VDC Current 0 25A Threshold values 1 Voltage including 38 60 V ripple Current channel 0 31A Current module 4A Power of tungsten filament lamp Maximum 6W Leakage current at 0 lt 0 5mA Voltage drop at 1 lt 1 5V Load impedance minimum 192 Ohms Response time 2 1 2 ms Frequency of switching to inductive load 0 5 LI2 Hz Paralleling of outputs Yes maximum of 2 Compatibility with IEC 1131 2 DC inputs Yes type 1 and type 2 Built in protection against over voltage Yes by Transil diode against inversions Yes by inverted diode 3 against short circuits and overloads Yes by current limiter and electric circuit breaker 1 5 In lt Id lt 2 In Pre actuator voltage check threshold OK gt 36V Error lt 24V Check response time on appearance T lt 4ms on disappearance T lt 30 ms 5 V consumption typical 80 mA maximum 90 mA 24 V pre actuator consumption 4 typical 40 mA ma
238. k Configurable output fallback Terminal block Automatic output cut off device on unlocking of terminal blocks unlocking Connections Screw terminal block TSXee reference DSY 08S5 DSY 16S5 DSY 16S4 number 35010512 07 2011 27 Discrete general overview Catalog The following table provides a catalog of transistor Discrete output modules with HE10 connectors Type of module Transistor outputs with HE10 connectors Illustration Discrete output module Discrete output module Number of 32 outputs 64 outputs channels Range 24 VDC Insulation Insulated outputs Current 0 1A IEC 1131 2 Yes compliance Protection Outputs protected against short circuits and overloads with automatic or controlled reactivation Fallback Configurable fallback of outputs permanent monitoring of output control and reset of outputs in the event of detection of an internal fault Logic Positive Connections HE 10 connector TSXee reference DSY 32T2K DSY 64T2K number 28 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general overview Catalog of Discrete mixed I O modules At a Glance Catalog The following is the catalog of Discrete mixed I O modules with HE10 connectors The following table provides a catalog of Discrete mixed I O modules with HE10 connectors Type of module Transistor outputs with HE10 connectors Illustration Discrete mixed I O module D
239. kV 35010512 07 2011 305 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 19 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2B1connection base Aim of this section This section describes the connection base TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2B1 What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Actuator connections on ABE 7S08S2B1 static output adaptation base 307 Characteristics of ABE 7S08S2B1 static output adaptation bases 308 306 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Actuator connections on ABE 7S08S2B1 static output adaptation base At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7S08S2B1 base 8 static outputs 24 VDC 2 A Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC H OVDG T ABE7 S0852B1 8 non isolated outputs 24VDC 2A P ers Aana w Q a 8 6 a7 On protected o outputs only e 5 i i i N o eeggLegeRELSLRSL2RSLLIRSLLRL22RQSLLRS Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base TSX module Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base
240. l blocks it is essential to change the statuses of Sel and Direct only when the 0 status of input E is at 0 484 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The table below shows the tracking of two timers E Outpt xT Sel t2i ome lt Direct 35010512 07 2011 485 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Operation idle time with value selection Role This function is used to apply a t1i or t2i on delay or off delay to an action The assignment of a t1i time out on delay to an action causes the t2i off delay for this same action Similarly the assignment of a t2i time out on delay causes a t1i off delay to be assigned Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning E Timer input Sel Selection of time out t1i or t2i e Sel 0 tli on delay t2i off delay Sel 1 t2i on delay t1i off delay Direct Selection of block for string operation e Direct 0 block selected e Direct 1 block not selected output x takes the value of E x Timer s physical output x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output Illustration E ETOP 486 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Operation Illustration This table describes the different operating phases of the operation idle timer with value selection Ph
241. l0 y ag i TSXDSY16T2 E Configuration Debugging o Channel fg Symbol _ Value Error Applied Q Slobal Unforcing i F1 e Lil 2 oF D _ Tack 2 e ae E a a 7 MAS ly 4 _0 e D 5 0 e 6 0 Reactivate FI 5 ball 0 e 4 al 0 10 0 e a 0 D A 0 43 o si 44 0 e l 15 0 e 5 35010512 07 2011 451 Debugging of discrete modules Description The following table shows the various parts of the debug screen and their functions Address Element Function 1 Tabs The tab in the foreground indicates the current mode Debug for this example Every mode can be selected using the respective tab e Debug only accessible in online mode e Adjust mode only available for the TSX DMY 28RFK see page 468 module e Configuration 2 Module zone Specifies the abbreviated heading of the module In the same zone there are 3 display LEDs giving information on the module s operating mode e RUN indicates the module s operating mode e ERR signals a fault within the module e 1 0 signals a fault outside the module or an application fault 3 Channel field Is used e By clicking on the reference number to display the tabs e Description which gives the characteristics of the device e 1 0 Objects see Unity Pro Operating Modes which is used to presymbolize the input output objects e Fault which shows the device faults in online mode e To select the channel e To display the Sym
242. leading to output fallback the state of these outputs assumes the value defined when configuring the Fallback mode see page 418 parameter The various commands available are e for one or more channels e force to 1 e force to 0 e unforcing when the channel or channels selected are forced e for all the channels of a module when at least one channel is forced e global unforcing of channels Procedure The following table shows the procedure for forcing or unforcing all or part of the channels of a module Step Action for one channel Action for all channels Access the module s debug screen 2 In the Value column right click the cell of the Click on the Global unforcing button found in the required channel general parameters field 3 Select the required function e forcing to 0 e forcing to 1 35010512 07 2011 453 Debugging of discrete modules How to access the SET and RESET commands At a Glance These commands are used to change the state of a module s outputs to 0 RESET or 1 SET NOTE the state of the output affected by one of these commands is temporary and can be modified at any time by the application when the PLC is in RUN Procedure The table below shows the procedure for assigning the value 0 or 1 to all or part of the channels of a module Step Action for one channel 1 Access the module s debug screen In the Value column right click the cell
243. lectric strength Output ground or Output internal logic 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of max module current Legend 1 For U 330 Vor 34 V 2 All the outputs are equipped with fast electromagnet demagnetization circuits Electromagnet discharge time lt L R 3 Fit a fuse to the 24 V pre actuator supply 4 Excluding load current 5 Nb number of outputs at 1 152 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08T22 Connecting the TSX DSY 08T22 module At a Glance The TSX DSY 08T22 module comprises 8 x 24 VDC protected transistor output channels This module is equipped with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to be connected Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an output is shown below Current ranei Monitoring Transil l I i i i i I i i i i i Control Q 0 n Pre actuator i I I Voltage Solid state i Monitoring switch i nti ti we s att Sh ps tn a a DD GD pases inne ts es se aaa Module Output 35010512 07 2011 153 TSX DSY 08T22 Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre
244. les with HE10 connectors Illustration The I O modules are housed in plastic cases which provide IP20 protection for all the electronic parts Elements The following table describes the different elements of the Discrete I O modules with HE10 connectors Number Description 1 Module display and diagnostics block 2 HE10 connector with a protective cover They are used to connect I Os to the sensors and pre actuators either directly or via TELEFAST 2 see page 249 connection bases 22 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general overview Catalog of Discrete input modules At a Glance The following is a presentation of Discrete Input modules with connection by screw terminal block or HE10 connectors Catalog The following table provides a catalog of Discrete input modules with screw terminal block connection Type of Inputs with screw terminal block connection module Illustration Discrete input module Discrete input module Number of 8 inputs 16 inputs channels Range 24 VDC 48 VDC 24 VAC 48 VAC 100 120 VAC 200 240 VAC 24 VDC Insulation Insulated inputs IEC 1131 2 Type 2 1 compliance Logic Positive Negative Proximity 2 wire DC and 3 wire PNP proximity 2 wire DC and 3 sensor sensor IEC 947 5 2 standard wire PNP compatibility compliant proximity sensor IEC 947 5 2 standard compliant 2 wire AC proximity sensor IEC 947 5 2 standard c
245. lex discrete module 20 55 Configuration of the Reflex Discrete Module 5 Description of the reflex function configuration editor How to assign and then configure a reflex function How to set the configuration parameters of a reflex function How to associate an event with a virtual output 421 422 423 424 425 427 431 432 433 434 436 437 439 440 441 443 444 446 447 449 450 451 453 454 455 456 457 459 460 462 464 465 466 467 468 469 471 472 473 35010512 07 2011 11 38 3 Reflex function blocks 0 0 0 0 cc cee eee 475 Function block Direct 0 0 0 2 0 eee ee eee 476 Reflex function block Combinational 000 cee eee 477 Reflex function block Operation timer 0 cee eee eee 479 Reflex function block Idle timer 0 00 0 eee eee eee 480 Reflex function block Operation idle timer 020000 481 Reflex function block 2 value operation timer 0 483 Reflex function block Operation idle time with value selection 486 Reflex function block Retriggerable monostable 489 Reflex function block Monostable with time delay 490 Reflex function block 2 value monostable 200000 492 Reflex function block Oscillator 2 0 0 0 00 0 eee eee eee 494 Reflex functi
246. locks 475 38 4 Modification of internal values using MOD_PARAM 521 35010512 07 2011 463 Installation of the discrete reflex module 38 1 General presentation of discrete reflex module Subject of this section This section presents the objectives of this module and the different functions available What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page General description of the reflex discrete module 465 Description of the reflex discrete module 466 464 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module General description of the reflex discrete module General The standard architecture of the PLC based on input output modules and periodic or event tasks does not allow the reaction time necessary for certain types of applications The purpose of the TSX DMY 28RFK reflex discrete module is to resolve these specific cases of applications For this reason it has a better response time than that of the Fast task or event task an output reaction with a simple logic less than 0 5 ms control over the speed of a moving part and stopping of movement when the speed falls too low tracking between movements timers with a time base of 0 1 ms generation of continuous oscillation at a fixed frequency but with a variable mark space ratio 35010512 07 2011 465 Installation of the discrete reflex module Description of the re
247. logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input Capacitive Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 164V Error lt 80 V Check response time on appearance 20 ms lt T lt 50 ms on disappearance 5ms lt T lt 15ms 5 V consumption typical 80 mA maximum 90 mA 35010512 07 2011 111 TSX DEY 16A5 Sensor supply consumption 1 typical 12 mA 12 x Nb mA maximum 16 mA 12 x Nb mA Dissipated power 1 1 W 0 4 x Nb W Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 Nb number of channels at 1 112 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16A5 Connecting the TSX DEY 16A5 module At a Glance The TSX DEY 16A5 module comprises 16 x 200 240 VAC type 1 inputs S u This module is fitted with a removable connection terminal block for the connection of inputs Circuit diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below Se ee ee ee a a a i E A 35010512 07 2011 113 TSX DEY 16A5 Module connection The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Sensors m Inputs 10 i 2 gt G o o i ls no ar 5 L N 5 amp G
248. lt 4ms configurable filtering 0 1 7 5 ms in 0 5 ms steps IEC 1131 2 compliance type 1 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength Input ground or Input internal logic 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input current sink Paralleling of inputs 1 Yes Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 18V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance 8 ms lt T lt 30 ms on disappearance 1ms lt T lt 3ms 5 V consumption typical 250 mA maximum 300 mA Sensor supply consumption 2 typical 20 mA 3 5 x Nb mA maximum 30 mA 3 5 x Nb mA 35010512 07 2011 121 TSX DEY 16FK Dissipated power 2 1 2 W 0 1 x Nb W Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 This characteristic is used to connect several inputs to the same module in parallel or to different modules for input redundancy 2 Nb number of channels at 1 122 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16FK Connecting the TSX DEY 16FK module At a Glance The TSX DEY 16FK module comprises 16 x 24 VDC type 1 fast input channels This module is equipped with a male HE10 connector A linked to the connection of inputs O to 15
249. ltering inputs are equipped with a filtering system which is programmable for each channel see page 117 e reflex and timing for applications requiring a faster response time than the FAST task or event processing lt 500 micros see page 241 240 35010512 07 2011 TSX DMY 28RFK Specific functions of the TSX DMY 28RFK module reflex and timing At a Glance Description The reflex and timing functions of the TSX DMY 28RFK module allow it to be used for applications requiring a faster response time than that of the FAST task or event processing lt 500 micros Reflex and timing functions allow those PLC functions that are executed on the module and disconnected from the PLC task to be performed by using the following as input variables physical module inputs module output commands module or channel error data physical module output statuses These functions are programmed using the Unity Proware see page 463 35010512 07 2011 241 TSX DMY 28RFK Characteristics of the TSX DMY 28RFK module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DMY 28RFK mixed module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DMY 28RFK module inputs The TSX DMY 28RFK module 24 VDC positive logic inputs Nominal input values Voltage 24 VDC Current 3 5 mA Threshold input values at 1 Voltage 211
250. mA Response time State 0 to 1 0 1 ms 10 ms 0 1 ms 10 ms State 1 to 0 0 6 ms 10 ms 0 02 ms 0 6 ms 10 ms Switching frequency on inductive load lt 0 5 LI Voltage assigned to Input output 300 V insulation Voltage assigned to shock Input output 2 5 kV 342 35010512 07 2011 Implementation of safety modules 32 Overview This chapter describes implementation of the range of safety modules for Premium PLCs and of the dedicated TELEFAST 2 pre formed cabling accessory What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 32 1 General presentation of the safety modules 344 32 2 Safety functions 348 32 3 General rules for the installation of safety modules 355 32 4 Precautions and general rules for wiring 360 32 5 Connection and wiring examples 365 32 6 Maintenance and diagnostics 379 32 7 TSX PAY 262 module 389 32 8 TSX PAY 282 module 394 35010512 07 2011 343 Implementing safety modules 32 1 General presentation of the safety modules Overview This section provides a general introduction to safety modules What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page General description of safety modules 345 Physical description of the safety modules 346 Catalog of safety modules 347 344 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules General desc
251. must be linked to each connector except in the event where the corresponding channels are not in use and are not assigned to any task NOTE in the event that the 24 VDC installation is not carried out according to VLSV very low safety voltage standards the 24 VDC power supplies must have the OV linked to mechanical ground which is in turn linked to the ground as close as possible to the power supply This restriction is necessary for personnel safety in the event of a power phase coming into contact with the 24 VDC supply Recommendations for use concerning Discrete I O module inputs are as follows e for fast input modules TSX DEY 16 FK DMY 28FK DMY 28RFK e inthe event that 24 VDC direct current inputs are used it is recommended to adapt the filtering time to the required function e in order for bounces not to be taken into account upon closure of contacts it is not advisable to use sensors with mechanical contact outputs if the filtering time is reduced to under 3 ms e for faster operation the use of direct current inputs and sensors is recommended as alternating current inputs have a much higher response time 40 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general implementation rules e for 24 VDC inputs and line coupling with an alternating current network e operation can be disturbed if the coupling between cables relaying an alternating current and cables relaying signals intended for direct current inputs is too large This
252. n of the module the management of the explicit exchanges MW0 0 MOD 0 O for example will not be detected by the application For in rack modules explicit exchanges are done immediately on t he local PLC Bus and are finished before the end of the execution task So the READ_ STS for example is always finished when the sMWO 0 mod 0 0 bit is checked by the application For remote bus Fipio for example explicit exchanges are not synchronous with the execution task so the detection is possible by the application The illustration below shows the different significant bits for managing exchanges Adjustment bit 2 Command bit 1 Y Status bit 0 EXCH RPT MWr m c 1 EXCH _ STS MWr m c 0 Status parameters READ STS Command parameters WRITE_CMD WRITE_PARAM Adjustment parameters READ PARAM SAVE PARAM RESTORE PARAM Reconfiguration bit 15 35010512 07 2011 427 Language Objects Description of Significant Bits Each bit of the words EXCH_ STS SMWr m c 0 and EXCH RPT MWr m c 1 is associated with a type of parameter e Rank 0 bits are associated with the status parameters e The STS _IN_ PROGR bit SMWr m c 0 0 indicates whether a read request for the status words is in progress e The STS_ERR bit sMWr m c 1 0 specifies whether a read request for the status words is accepted by the module channel
253. nd output functions Module and sensor Module and pre actuator me supply lay supply r 42 aa WT 4 0 VDC VDC ane HII VDC VDC aan 7H12R10M1 I 7HI2R10 11 eeove S868 2 88 gees fee l o o i o Up T SHE y i o fot sensors j i actuators l a LA a or 9 or N ce o Oo T 3 o o o o 3 c c c E Es c tad Cc Cc Cc C Z E Cc oO o o o oc S oc S x x yt oe co p O O oO O O_O O O O Connecting the common for sensors e onto terminals 1 or 2 sensors to the of the supply positive logic inputs Connecting the common for pre actuators e several terminals linked to the polarity 3 4 200 201 202 and 203 allowing sharing in groups of 4 or 2 channels positive logic outputs 35010512 07 2011 269 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 5 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H08R21 and ABE 7H16R20 16R21 16R23 Connection Bases Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H08R21 and ABE 7H16R20 R21 R23 Bases for Type 2 Inputs At a Glanc
254. nd parameters WRITE_PARAM gt Current adjustment Jel READ_PARAM parameters SAVE PARAM le Current adjustment parameters Initial adjustment RESTORE PARAM parameters z 1 Only with READ_STS and WRITE_CMD instructions Managing Exchanges During an explicit exchange it is necessary to check performance to ensure data is only taken into account when the exchange has been correctly executed To do this two types of information is available e information concerning the exchange in progress see page 429 e the exchange report see page 430 The following diagram describes the management principle for an exchange Execution of an Exchange in Exchange explicit exchange progress report NOTE In order to avoid several simultaneous explicit exchanges for the same channel it is necessary to test the value of the word EXCH_STS MWr m c 0 of the IODDT associated to the channel before calling any EF addressing this channel 426 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Management of Exchanges and Reports with Explicit Objects At a Glance Illustration When data is exchanged between the PLC memory and the module the module may require several task cycles to acknowledge this information All IODDTs use two words to manage exchanges EXCH STS SMWr m c 0 exchange in progress EXCH RPT MWr m c 1 report NOTE Depending on the localizatio
255. nel MWr m c 2 8 LINE_FLT BOOL R External error Line fault MWr m c 2 9 Status word CH_CMD The table below shows the CH_CMD MWr m c 3 status word bit meanings The command is executed by aWRITE CMD IODDT_ VAR1 Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number REAC_OUT BOOL R W Reactivation of tripped outputs protected MWr m c 3 0 outputs PS_CTRL_DIS BOOL R W Inhibit control of external supply MWr m c 3 1 PS_CTRL_EN BOOL R W Validation of the external supply control MWr m c 3 2 NOTE This object is specific to output modules with reactivation Output specific objects VALUE1 and VALUE2 The following table presents word meanings specific for VALU E1 and VALUE2 reflex output Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number VALUE1 INT R W Contains the first internal value of the function MWr m c 4 block VALUE2 INT R W Contains the second internal value of the MWr m c 5 function block 35010512 07 2011 445 Language Objects Details of the Language Objects of the T_ GEN_MOD Type lIODDT At a Glance Observations List of Objects All the modules of Premium PLCs have an associated IODDT of type T_GEN_ MOD e In general the meaning of the bits is given for bit status 1 In specific cases an explanation is given for each status of the bit e Not all bits are used The table below presents the objects of the IODDT
256. neral characteristics This table describes the general characteristics of base ABE 7R16S212 Base type ABE 7R16S212 Channel number 16 Contact characteristics Job limit voltage Alternating 250 V Direct 125 V Thermal current 5A Alternating current Resistive load AC12 Voltage 230 VAC load Current 1 1 5A Inductive load AC15 Voltage 230 VAC Current 1 0 9A Direct current load Resistive load DC12 Voltage 24 VDC Current 1 1 5A Inductive load DC13 2 Voltage 24 VDC Current 1 0 6A Minimum switching Current 10 mA Voltage 5V Response time State 0 to 1 10 ms State 1 to 0 5 ms Maximum speed of function loading 0 5 Hz Built in protection measures Against overloads and short circuits None provide one rapid fusion fuse per channel or group of channels Against alternating current inductive overcharging None each RC circuit or MOV ZNO suppressor must be mounted on the posts of each pre actuator appropriate to the voltage Against direct current inductive overcharging None each discharge diode must be mounted on the posts of each pre actuator Voltage assigned to insulation Coil contact 300 V 298 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Base type ABE 7R16S212 Voltage assigned to shock resistance 1 2 50 Coil contact 2 5 kV Key 1 For 0 5 x 108 maneuvers
257. ng of fuse Supply for ABE 7 base and TSX originally fitted to the base i module outputs 1 A fast blow O G 0 voc VDC ABE 7P167334 Hf 200 201 215 300 100 301 101 3151115 OQ jf Actuator 24 240 VCA gt OU 4 or 5 127 VDC supply gt 4 Channel0O Channel 1 Channel 15 Functionality per channel 0 5 A fuse NOTE Provide one protection fuse per actuator or per group if fed from the same voltage Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit in the case of alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 330 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 31 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T318 connection base Actuator connections on ABE 7P16T318 electromechanical or static output relay base width 12 5 mm At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T318 base 16 relay outputs 1 OF distribution of the 2 polarities per group of 4 channels 1 fuse and 1 isolator per channel relays not provided
258. ng phases of the monostable with time Description On the rising edge of input E e time out tti is launched time base of 0 1ms e output x Aux changes to 1 When time out t1i is over e time out t2i is launched time base of 0 1ms e output x changes to 1 for duration t2i If the high status of input E lasts less time than time out t1i output x stays at 0 Role Structure Name E X x Aux Operation delay Phase 1 2 3 When time out t2i is over outputs x and x Aux change to 0 If a new rising edge for input E occurs before time out t2i has elapsed output x remains at 1 for duration t2i of the cycle in progress e anew cycle begins see phase 490 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the monostable with time delay function block tti t2i x Aux 35010512 07 2011 491 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block 2 value monostable Role Structure Operation This function enables an action of duration t1i or t2i to be applied to the triggering of an action The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning E Monostable input Sel Selection of time out t1i or t2i e Sel 0 tli on delay Sel 1 t2i on delay Direct Selection of block for str
259. nt power supply for sensors and pre actuators associated with Discrete I O modules 0 00 eee eee Precautions and General Rules for Wiring with Discrete I O Modules Means of Connecting Discrete I O Modules Connecting Screw Terminal Block MOduleS cn ana e tah ores be ie ete eet eet dk Connecting Discrete I O Modules HE10 Connector Modules Connecting Discrete I O Modules to TELEFAST Interfaces Using an HE10 Connector 2 pes pee neS fests Mei hd bee eats an eed Shae Sensor Input Compatibility and Pre Actuator Output Compatibility Fault processing for Discrete I O modules General protective measures of Discrete I O modules Discrete Inputs Outputs fault display 000 c eee eee eee Discrete Inputs Outputs Fault Diagnostics 0 000 0 Checking the Discrete Input Output connection 13 15 17 19 20 21 22 23 25 29 31 32 34 35 37 39 40 44 46 48 50 55 56 57 60 64 35010512 07 2011 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 TSX DEY 08D2 input module 0 0000es 67 Presentation of the TSX DEY 08D2 module 68 Characteristics of the TSX DEY 08D2 module 69 Connecting the TSX DEY 08D2 module 0 20055 71 TSX DEY 16D2 Discrete input module 73 Presentation o
260. number 0 The event 0 is solely associated to channel 0 Event processing can be triggered e on a rising edge from 0 to 1 e ona falling edge from 1 to 0 of the associated input When two edges are detected simultaneously on a module the events are processed according to channel number in ascending order The edge recurrence time on each input or the pulse width on an input programmed in FM FD must correspond to those shown in the following diagram FO or FD T recurrence k A Y FO or FD T width oo Given that T recurrence or T width gt 0 25 ms 0 25 x number of module Evts Max Evt frequency 1 kHz number of module Evts Max number of Evts in burst 100 Evts per 100 ms 120 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 16FK Characteristics of the TSX DEY 16FK module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16FK module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 16FK module The TSX DEY 16FK module 24 VDC positive logic fast inputs Nominal input values Voltage 24 VDC Current 3 5 mA Threshold input values at1 Voltage 211V Current 23 mA atO Voltage SV Current lt 1 5mA Sensor supply including ripple 19 30 V possibly up to 34 V limited to 1 hour every 24 hours Input impedance at nominal U 6 3 kOhms Response time by defau
261. o access the forcing unforcing function 453 How to access the SET and RESET commands 454 How to access the masking unmasking of an event function 455 How to Access the Reactivation of Outputs Command 456 Applied outputs of a discrete module 457 35010512 07 2011 449 Debugging of discrete modules Introduction to the Debugging function of a discrete module Introduction The Debugging function allows you for each discrete input output module of the application to view the parameters of each of its channels state of the channel filter value etc and to access the diagnostics and adjust modes of the selected channel forcing of the channel masking of the channel etc The function also gives access to module diagnostics in the event of a fault NOTE this function is only available in online mode 450 35010512 07 2011 Debugging of discrete modules Description of the debug screen of a discrete module At a Glance Illustration The debug screen see Unity Pro Operating Modes shows in real time the value and state of each channel of the selected module It also allows access to the channel commands forcing of the input or output value reactivation of outputs etc The figure below shows a sample debug screen 1 2 16Q 24VDC 0 5A SRC TBLK e r Run Err
262. ode 3 against short circuits and overloads Yes by current limiter and electric circuit breaker 1 5 In lt Id lt 2 In Pre actuator voltage check threshold OK gt 18V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance T lt 4ms on disappearance T lt 30 ms 5 V consumption typical 80 mA maximum 90 mA 24 V pre actuator consumption 4 typical 40 mA maximum 60 mA Dissipated power 5 1 1 W 0 75 x Nb W 35010512 07 2011 163 TSX DSY 16T2 Dielectric strength Output ground or Output internal logic 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of max module current Legend 1 For U 330 Vor 34 V 2 All the outputs are equipped with fast electromagnet demagnetization circuits Electromagnet discharge time lt L R 3 Fit a fuse to the 24 V pre actuator supply 4 Excluding load current 5 Nb number of outputs at 1 164 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 16T2 Connecting the TSX DSY 16T2 module At a Glance The TSX DSY 16T2 module comprises 16 x 24 VDC protected transistor output channels piAs Loy This module is equipped with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to be conne
263. odules Overview This chapter gives a general introduction to the Discrete I O modules What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page General description of the Discrete I O modules 20 Physical description of Discrete modules with screw terminal block connection 21 Physical description of Discrete modules with HE10 connectors 22 Catalog of Discrete input modules 23 Catalog of Discrete output modules 25 Catalog of Discrete mixed I O modules 29 35010512 07 2011 19 Discrete general overview General description of the Discrete I O modules At a Glance Inputs Outputs The Discrete I O modules of the Premium range are standard format modules occupying one single position equipped with either a HE10 connector or a screw terminal block TSX BLY 01 For modules fitted with HE10 type connector outputs a series of products known as TELEFAST 2 see page 249 are available that enable Discrete input output modules to be quickly connected to operational parts A wide range of Discrete inputs and outputs make it possible to meet the following requirements e functional direct or alternating I Os positive or negative logic e modularity 8 16 32 or 64 channels modules Inputs receive signals from the sensors and carry out the following functions e acquisition e adaptation e galvanic insulation e filtering e protection against interf
264. of the required channel 3 Select the desired function Set e Reset 454 35010512 07 2011 Debugging of discrete modules How to access the masking unmasking of an event function At a Glance This function is used to inhibit or reestablish the processing associated with the input or output channel that caused the event The various commands available are e Mask masks events e Unmask cancels the masking of events NOTE if one or more events occur whilst in the inhibited state the associated processing operations are lost Procedure The following table shows the procedure for masking or unmasking all or part of the channels configured in event processing Step Action for one or more channels Action for all the configured channels of the modules of the application 1 Access the module s debug screen Access the CPU debug screen In the Status column right click the cell of the required channel Click on the Enable Disable button situated in the Events field Select the desired function Key 1 Global masking unmasking can also be carried out by e the MASKEVT instruction e the UNMASKEVT instruction e the system bit S38 35010512 07 2011 455 Debugging of discrete modules How to Access the Reactivation of Outputs Command At a Glance When a fault has caused a tripped output this command is us
265. oideas 62 0131 0122 0121 0232 T TELEFAST terminals 374 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Feedback loop connection General The category 4 immediate stop system design requires supply shut off device redundancy and activation monitoring Wiring of open contacts K3 K4 or K3 K4 K5 K6 allows every activation request to be checked It is compulsory for the contacts of relays K3 K4 or K3 K4 K5 K6 to be mechanically linked Category 3 wiring means e no wiring of auxiliary contacts in the feedback loop a strap links terminals Y1 and Y2 S33 e standard switches with non guided contacts are sufficient 2 switch set up category 4 TT Y1 K3 K4 Y2 Sie 14 A 13 Ks K4 24 123 a z F2 or N or 4 switch set up category 4 N3 or N2 or 35010512 07 2011 375 Implementing safety modules Reactivation connection Introduction This section shows the different ways of wiring the safety system reactivation function Automatic reactivation Wiring diagram for automatic reactivation protective cover O 33 E Y3 m TELEFAST terminal block Manual reactivation Once every ES PB or PS is unlocked it is possible to choose whether or not to monitor manual reactivation of the safety system The different wiring diagrams for manual reactivation are shown below With Reactivation button monitoring recommended O Reactivation
266. ollowing table provides a summary of compatibility between sensors and Discrete I O module inputs Types of input Types of proximity sensor 24 VDC Type 1 Positive logic 24 48 VDC Type 2 Positive logic 24 VDC Negative logic 24 48 VAC 100 120 VAC Type 2 200 240 VAC Type 2 All PNP type 3 wire DC proximity sensors Compatibility Compatibility All NPN type 3 wire DC proximity sensors Compatibility Telemecanique or other brand 2 wire DC proximity sensors with the following characteristics Voltage drop in closed state lt 7 V Minimum switched current lt 2 5 MA Residual current in open state lt 1 5 mA Compatibility Compatibility Compatibility 2 wire AC DC proximity sensor Compatibility Compatibility Compatibility 1 2 wire AC proximity sensor Compatibility Compatibility 1 Legend 1 In the nominal voltage range of 220 240 VAC DC DC voltage operation AC AC voltage operation AC DC AC or DC voltage operation 52 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general implementation rules Compatibility of Pre Actuators with Outputs e Compatibility of DC pre actuators and outputs e comply with the output s maximum current and maximum switching frequency as specified in the table of characteristics e where low consumption pre actuators are used special attention must be paid to the leakage cu
267. ompliant Filtering 4 ms integrated Integrated 50 or 60 Hz Network Connections Screw terminal block 35010512 07 2011 23 Discrete general overview TSXee reference number DEY 08D2 DEY 16D2 DEY 16D3 DEY 16A2 DEY 16A3 DEY 16A4 DEY 16A5 Legend 1 For the TSX DEY 16A2 module type 2 compliance is only for the 24 VAC version Catalog The following table provides a catalog of Discrete input modules with HE10 connectors Type of module Inputs with HE10 connectors Illustration Discrete input module Discr Mod Discr Mod Discr I Mod Number of channels 16 fast inputs 32 inputs 64 inputs Range 24 VDC 48 VDC 24 VDC Insulation Insulated inputs IEC 1131 2 compliance Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Logic Positive Proximity sensor 2 wire proximity sensor compatibility 3 wire PNP proximity sensor see page 50 Filtering 0 1 7 5 ms in 0 5 ms steps 4 ms fixed Programmable filtering yes Latching yes Event yes Connections HE10 connectors TSXee reference number DEY 16FK DEY 32D2K DEY 32D3K DEY 64D2K 24 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general overview Catalog of Discrete output modules At a Glance Catalog The following is the catalog of transistor relay and bidirectional triode thyristor Discrete output modules with screw terminal block connec
268. on block D flip flop 2 0 20 0 cee eee eee 495 Reflex function block T flip flop 2 0 0 0 eee eee eee 497 Reflex Function Block 2 Threshold Counter 0 00 499 Reflex function block Single electronic CAM 0000 501 Reflex function block 1 threshold intervalometer 503 Reflex function block Burst 0 0 00 cee eee eee ees 505 Reflex function block PWM Pulse Width Modulation 506 Reflex function block Detection of underspeed 508 Reflex function block Speed monitoring 0 e eee eee 510 Reflex function block Type 1 command check 513 Reflex function block Type 2 command check 05 515 Reflex function block Command counting 0000 eee 517 Reflex function block Fault Signaling 0 00 ee eee eee 519 38 4 Modification of internal values using MOD_PARAM 521 Modification of the internal values using MOD_PARAM function 521 Glossary 6 i hes eee Pee eee ade ee eee a 523 Index oiuei este ta a erone aa lar Behe aata de eee ata wm wee a 525 12 35010512 07 2011 Safety Information A Important Information NOTICE Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on
269. on of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T22 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08T22 module The TSX DSY 08T22 module 24 VDC positive logic transistor outputs Nominal values Voltage 24 VDC Current 2A Threshold values 1 Voltage including ripple 19 30 V 34 V possible for 1 hour every 24 hours Current channel 2 5A Current module 14A Power of tungsten filament lamp Maximum 10 W Leakage current at 0 lt 1mA Voltage drop at 1 lt 0 5V Load impedance minimum 12 Ohms Response time 2 200 micros Frequency of switching to inductive load 0 5 LI2 Hz Paralleling of outputs Yes maximum of 2 Compatibility with IEC 1131 2 DC inputs Yes type 1 and type 2 Built in protection against over voltage Yes by Transil diode against inversions Yes by inverted diode 3 against short circuits and overloads Yes by current limiter and electric circuit breaker 1 5 In lt Id lt 2 In Pre actuator voltage check threshold OK gt 18V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance T lt 4ms on disappearance T lt 30 ms 5 V consumption typical 55 mA maximum 65 mA 24 V pre actuator consumption 4 typical 30 mA maximum 50 mA 35010512 07 2011 151 TSX DSY 08T22 Dissipated power 5 1 3 W 0 2 x Nb W Die
270. opening the contact to the positive pole with reactivation no longer being possible due to the self checking of inputs e the short circuiting of the 24 VCC external supply whether single or double contact wiring is in use No supply to the safety system leading to immediate opening of the safety outputs The A1 A2 external supply is protected by the 750 mA current limit and a fault is indicated in the safety system Pressing a short circuited ES PB or PS opens the safety outputs and the self checking means reactivation is impossible But opening a second ES PB or PS prior to reactivation renders self checking ineffective as here both channels reach a consistent state Input self checking is also made ineffective if a cut in external supply occurs or is caused following the activation of a faulty ES PB or PS as the module is reinitialized on power up and reactivation is possible once more 35010512 07 2011 381 Implementing safety modules Displaying safety module faults At a Glance Illustration Description The safety modules are fitted with LED allowing module and channel status to be displayed We can see e the module status LEDs RUN ERR and I O e the channel status LEDs CHe The following diagram shows the safety module display screen a T EERE helete akeke BSSSESES H BSSSHaas BE Depending on their status on flashing or off the three LEDs located on e
271. output changes to 1 If the high status of input E lasts less time than tri output x stays at 0 On the falling edge of the E input off delay time out tfi is launched time base of 0 1ms When time out tfi is over the x output changes to 0 During time out tfi if the low status of input E lasts less time than tfi output x stays at 1 Note The x Aux output is at 1 as long as input E or output x is at 1 35010512 07 2011 481 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the operation idle timer function block E l i tri l tfi l l a Pinn l l x Aux 482 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block 2 value operation timer Role This function is used to apply a t1i or t2i on delay to an action Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning E Timer input Sel Selection of time out t1i or t2i e Sel 0 time out tti e Sel 1 time out t2i Direct Selection of block for string operation e Direct 0 block selected e Direct 1 block not selected output x takes the value of E x Timers physical output x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output Illustration Outnut x 4 Direct t2i Output g Aux Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the
272. owing table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DEY 08D2 module The TSX DEY 08D2 module 24 VDC positive logic inputs Nominal input values Supply 24 VDC Current 7 mA Threshold input values at 1 Supply 211V Current 26 5 mA for U 11 V at 0 Supply SV Current 2mA Sensor supply including ripple 19 30 V possibly up to 34 V limited to 1 hour every 24 hours Input impedance at nominal U 4 kOhms Response time typical 4ms maximum 7ms IEC 1131 2 compliance type 2 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input current sink Paralleling of inputs 1 yes Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 18V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance 1ms lt T lt 3ms on disappearance 8 ms lt T lt 30 ms 5 V consumption typical 55 mA maximum 65 mA Sensor supply consumption 2 typical 25 mA 7 x Nb mA maximum 33 mA 7 x Nb mA 35010512 07 2011 69 TSX DEY 08D2 Dissipated power 2 1 W 0 15 x Nb W Legend 1 This characteristic is used to connect several inputs to the same module in parallel or to different modules for input redundancy 2 Nb number of channels at 1 70 35010512
273. page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength Input ground or Input internal logic 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input current sink Paralleling of inputs Yes Sensor voltage check OK gt 36V threshold Error lt 24V Check response time on appearance 8 ms lt T lt 30 ms on disappearance 1ms lt T lt 3ms 5 V consumption typical 300 mA maximum 350 mA Sensor supply typical 50 mA 7 x Nb mA consumption 1 maximum 66 mA 7 x Nb mA Dissipated power 1 2 5 W 0 34 x Nb W 35010512 07 2011 133 TSX DEY 32D3K Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 Nb number of channels at 1 134 35010512 07 2011 TSX DEY 32D3K Connecting the TSX DEY 32D3K module At a Glance The TSX DEY 32D3K module comprises 32 x 48 VDC type 2 inputs This module is fitted with 2 male HE10 connectors e connector A for inputs O to 15 e connector C for inputs 16 to 31 Principle Diagram The circuit diagram for an input is shown below Fuse Sensor supply and voltage monitoring Sensor Input l 0 n Entry 35010512 07 2011 135 TSX DEY 32D3K Module connection Sensors The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Inputs Sensors Inputs PE O
274. peration idle time with value selection 486 Reflex function block Retriggerable monostable 489 Reflex function block Monostable with time delay 490 Reflex function block 2 value monostable 492 Reflex function block Oscillator 494 Reflex function block D flip flop 495 Reflex function block T flip flop 497 Reflex Function Block 2 Threshold Counter 499 Reflex function block Single electronic CAM 501 Reflex function block 1 threshold intervalometer 503 Reflex function block Burst 505 Reflex function block PWM Pulse Width Modulation 506 Reflex function block Detection of underspeed 508 Reflex function block Speed monitoring 510 Reflex function block Type 1 command check 513 Reflex function block Type 2 command check 515 Reflex function block Command counting 517 Reflex function block Fault Signaling 519 35010512 07 2011 475 Installation of the discrete reflex module Function block Direct Role Structure Operation Illustration This default block applies no reflex function to the module s output The output is therefore controlled from the application as on a module of standard discrete outputs The table below shows the various interfaces of the block Name Meaning x Physical output of the block x Aux Auxiliary output within the block The physical output x is directly controlled by its command bit CMD_OUT Qr m c updated by the PLC processor The values of th
275. plementing safety modules Faults Possible causes Check False input data Voltage drop on cables Voltage between terminals S01 S112 and 121 S232 gt 18 2 VDC all ES PBs closed Legend sc Short Circuit ss Safety System ES PB Emergency Stop Push Button PS Position Switch NOTE If the fault persists following wiring check the module should be changed To avoid errors when replacing a product it is recommended to mark the slot on the module label on the front panel and the TSX CPP 02 cable label The specific red color of the TSX PAY 2 2 modules front panel allows errors to be avoided during PLC maintenance operations 386 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Test procedure Introduction Before using the installation or during a periodic check service it may be useful to test the module and its functions This procedure used may be as follows External supply The module has a built in external supply check A module is declared faulty if voltage falls below 19 VDC The module s I O LED lights up to signal the supply fault In this situation the module s safety system remains operational a drop in voltage to 10 VDC also causes safety outputs to open thus switching to the safe position The module is protected against polarity reversals and contains a current limiter set to 750 mA In the event of the external supply check not being activated
276. plied e wiring of the safety module outputs in series e wiring of as many S33 S34 reactivation contacts as there are modules in series electrically insulated contacts the reactivation contacts cannot be connected in parallel e wiring of the K3 K4 feedback loop on one of the modules and of a bridge between terminals Y1 Y2 on the other modules e wiring of the safety system inputs to each module independently no connection in series The following diagrams show the cables for the safety module connected in series for use with 2 or 4 contactors TSX PAY 262 TSX PAY 262 TSX PAY 262 24 23 24 23 24 23 ot ct 4 I m F 1 gt S 2 5 a 14 is 14 gt 3 ane 141 vy 13 5 K3 K4 oo gam oo PB or PS of PB or PS of PB or PS of module 1 module 2 module n TSX PAY 282 TSX PAY 262 ITSX PAY 262 34 4o O oi e ee a E O E i i i i mr z 14 i B lt i a A i i i i 13 14 g AD cin nS 14 y ys 2 i 1 a g FH K3 K4 K3 K4 F T tL PB or PS of PB or PS of PB or PS of module 1 module 2 module n NOTE Attention must be paid however to the drop in voltage on the output system due to the 0 1 Ohm safety relay contact resistance which depends on the relayed current Fora 2 5 A thermal current there will be a 4 V drop in power with 16 safety modules and a 16 V drop with
277. power NOTE the apparatus is capable of switching low loads 24 V 30 mA This is possible on condition that the contact has never previously switched heavy loads as the gold layer on the contact may have been damaged 35010512 07 2011 397 Implementing safety modules Operating conditions The following table shows the characteristics for using the TSX PAY 282 module Operating temperature Of the API 0 60 C Of the safety functions 1 10 60 C Humidity without condensation 5 95 Storage temperature 25 70 C Insulation resistance gt 10 MW below 500 VDC Dielectric strength on Sub D compliant with IEC1131 500 V actual 50 60 Hz 1 min Operating altitude 0 2000 m Degree of protection Terminals Unit IP20 compliant with IP IEC 529 Place of installation IP54 Maximum capacity of screw terminal blocks 2x 1 mm wires with termination Standards The following table shows the European and international standards the TSX PAY 282 module meets PLC specific recommendations EN61131 2 IEC 1131 2 CSA 22 2 No 142 UL508 Electrical qualities UL746L UL94 Electrical equipment of machinery EN60204 1 IEC204 1 Emergency stop equipment EN418 Machine safety Related control EN954 1 PR EN954 2 system parts EN953 EN1088 DIN VDE 0110 DIN VDE 0660 EN60947 5 1 VDE 57100 NF C63 850 IEC 664 398 35010512 07 2011 Discrete Inp
278. power 5 2 4 W 0 1 x Nb W Dielectric strength Output ground or Output internal logic 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of max module current Legend 1 For U lt 30 V or 34 V 2 All the outputs are equipped with fast electromagnet demagnetization circuits Electromagnet discharge time lt L R 3 Fit a 2 A fuse to the 24 V pre actuator supply 1 per connector 4 Excluding load current 5 Nb number of outputs at 1 228 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 64T2K Connecting the TSX DSY 64T2K module At a Glance Circuit diagram The TSX DSY 64T2K module comprises 64 positive logic transistor output channels for direct current This module is fitted with 4 male HE10 connectors connector A for outputs O to 15 connector B for outputs 16 to 31 connector C for outputs 32 to 47 connector D for outputs 48 to 63 The circuit diagram for an output is shown below X g Min 24 VDC fuse Output 0 at n L a 4 Solid state L oad switch ov Module Pre actuator 35010512 07 2011 229 TSX DSY 64T2K
279. put RESET 1 e counter initialized to 0 e input x Aux changes to 1 On the high status of input RESET 0 e input x is forced to 0 2 On the rising edge of input Up the counter is increased When threshold th1 is reached output x changes to 1 4 When threshold th2 is reached outputs x and x Aux change to 0 Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the simple cam function block RESET 0 RESET 1 m x Aux 502 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block 1 threshold intervalometer This function is used to trigger an action after an interval th with a maximum precision of 0 1ms The table below shows the block s different interfaces Meaning Intervalometer initialization input Outputs x and x Aux are set to 0 Time base 0 1ms to 6 5535 s Intervalometer s physical output Block s internal auxiliary output _INTERVALOMETER 1 _ Out x Role Structure Name E RESET 1 ti X x Aux Illustration Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the intervalometer Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input E co
280. r static output relay bases size 10 MM nonan annann eee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T215 connection base Actuator connections on ABE 7P16T215 electromechanical or static output relay bases size 10 mm 000 cee ee eee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R161T330 P16T330 connection bases Actuator connections on ABE 7R16T330 P16T330 electromechanical output relay bases size 12 5 mm 00 0c cece eee eee 296 297 298 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 312 314 314 316 316 317 317 319 319 321 321 323 323 35010512 07 2011 31 28 31 29 31 30 31 31 31 32 31 33 31 34 Chapter 32 32 1 32 2 32 3 32 4 32 5 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T332 P16T332 connection bases Actuator connections on ABE 7R161T332 P16T332 electromechanical output relay bases size 12 5 MM 0 0c cee eee eee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T370 connection base 2 55 Actuator connections on ABE 7R16T370 electromechanical output relay bases size 12 5 MM 0 c eee eee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T334 connection base 2055 Actuator connections on ABE 7P16T334 electromechanical or static output relay bases size 12 5 MM 0000 e eee eee eee TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T318 connection base 2 55 Actuator connections on ABE 7P16T318 electromechanical or static output relay base width 12 5 MM
281. ram for an output is shown below Current monitoring Control Pre actuator Voltage Solid state monitoring switch eyo Module Output Module connection The following diagram shows the connection of the module to the sensors Sensors FU1 0 5 A quick blow fuse 35010512 07 2011 237 TSX DMY 28FK Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the module to the pre actuators Pre actuators Outputs 9 GHO Oa LOOG 24 VDC FU2 10 A quick blow fuse 238 35010512 07 2011 TSX DMY 28RFK Discrete mixed I O module 30 Overview This chapter describes the TSX DMY 28RFK module its characteristics and its connection to the different sensors and pre actuators What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DMY 28RFK module 240 Specific functions of the TSX DMY 28RFK module reflex and timing 241 Characteristics of the TSX DMY 28RFK module 242 Connecting the TSX DMY 28RFK module 245 35010512 07 2011 239 TSX DMY 28RFK Presentation of the TSX DMY 28RFK module General The TSX DMY 28RFK module The TSX DMY 28RFK is a Discrete mixed I O module with both 16 x 24 VDC fast input connector channels and 12 x 24 VDC transistor output channels This module s inputs have the following specific functions e programmable fi
282. ram shows the position of the three fault display LEDs on the front panel of the Discrete I O modules LEDs RUN ERR I O Channel status LEDs Description The following table explains how the LEDs located on the Discrete I O display block operate LEDs Continually lit Flashing Off RUN Module operating normally Module faulty or off green ERR Internal error Module failure Communication error if No internal error red RUN LED is on Module non configured if RUN LED is off 1 0 External fault overload short circuit sensor pre Terminal block error No external error red actuator voltage error Channel Channel at 1 Channel error overload Channel at 0 status or short circuit NOTE When the sensor power outage the error LED of the following modules switch on and the last recorded position of the sensor is displayed by the inputs LED 35010512 07 2011 57 Discrete fault processing The following list gives the 24 VDC modules e TSX DEY 16D2 e TSX DEY 32D2K e TSX DEY 64D2K The following list gives the 48 VDC modules e TSX DEY 16D3 e TSX DEY32D3K A WARNING CHANNEL LED INFORMATION NOT MATCHING SENSORS POSITION After a sensor power outage e The I O error LED is on e Do not take into account the input LEDs information they show the last recorded position of the sensors not their real positions e Check the real positions on the sensors Failure to follow these
283. rance range is not accepted when validating Adding deleting or changing the event number is not accessible in online mode The maximum frequency of events is 1 kHz Number of event programmed outputs The maximum number of events in burst is 100 events per 100 ms 35010512 07 2011 473 Installation of the discrete reflex module Procedure The following table shows the various steps involved in associating an event with an output and then defining its properties Step Action Access the module configuration screen Select the Config outputs tab Double click in the Event cell of the channel to be assigned Select the desired function Enter the event number Evt oO a AJOJN Repeat the operation for each channel to be configured from step3 474 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module 38 3 Reflex function blocks Subject of this Section This section presents the different reflex functions available What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Function block Direct 476 Reflex function block Combinational 477 Reflex function block Operation timer 479 Reflex function block Idle timer 480 Reflex function block Operation idle timer 481 Reflex function block 2 value operation timer 483 Reflex function block O
284. re actuator voltage checking devices The Other errors category includes switched off modules The following table can be used to determine the module s status on the basis of the LEDs located on the Discrete I O modules display block State of module LEDs RUN green ERR red I O red Normal operation e O O Internal errors Module failure no PLC communication Module failure PLC communication possible Communication error External errors Terminal block error Overload short circuit sensor pre actuator voltage error 0000o O08966 3 000 35010512 07 2011 61 Discrete fault processing State of module LEDs RUN green ERR red I O red Other errors Module switched off O Q O Legend e LED on LED flashing Q O LED off A WARNING CHANNEL LED INFORMATION NOT MATCHING SENSORS POSITION After a sensor power outage e The I O error LED is on e Do not take into account the input LEDs information they show the last recorded position of the sensors not their real positions e Check the real positions on the sensors Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage NOTE When the sensor detects power outage the error LED of the following modules switchs on and the last recorded state of the sensor is displayed by the inp
285. re actuators to be controlled and this section is isolated from the control section reactivation When the reactivation conditions are satisfied feedback loop closed AND reactivation input activated outputs can be controlled e Outputs idle LED 26 off e Outputs active LED 26 on 388 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules 32 7 TSX PAY 262 module Overview This section describes the characteristics of the TSX PAY 262 module What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX PAY 262 module 390 Characteristics of the TSX PAY 262 module 391 35010512 07 2011 389 Implementing safety modules Presentation of the TSX PAY 262 module Introduction TSX PAY 262 module The TSX PAY 262 module is an I O safety module developed to comply with the requirements of European and international standards for electronic industrial automation equipment and safety circuits 390 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Characteristics of the TSX PAY 262 module Introduction This section describes the general characteristics of the TSX PAY 262 module its input output characteristics operating conditions and applied standards General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX PAY 262 module Safety functions ES PB and PS monitoring Yes 1
286. re linked to the polarity 35010512 07 2011 273 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 7 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H08S21 16S21 Connection Bases Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on ABE 7H08S21 16S21 Bases with One Isolator per Channel At a Glance This is an overview of the sensor and pre actuator connections on TELEFAST 2 bases NOTE The bases are manufactured with a general purpose quick blow fuse rated 2 A To guarantee optimum protection this fuse should be rated according to the application connection to input or output functions and the maximum current allowable in the base Type and rating of fuse to be fitted to the base e input functions 0 5 A quick blow e output functions e 2A quick blow on the ABE 7H16S21 base e 6 3 A quick blow on the ABE 7H08S21 base Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 424VDC OVDC ABE HO8S21 24VDC CHO CHO OVDC ABE 7H1692 16 Digital Inputs Outputs 8 Digital WO 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 0 L ripe my s 2Amax T EH ia fs 6 3Amax Fuse 1 2 30 4 0 0 1E 2 3 4p Fuse_
287. requirements of European and international standards for electronic industrial automation equipment and safety circuits 35010512 07 2011 395 Implementing safety modules Characteristics of the TSX PAY 282 module Introduction This section describes the general characteristics of the TSX PAY 282 module its input output characteristics operating conditions and applied standards General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX PAY 282 module Safety functions ES PB and PS monitoring Yes 1 to 12 single or double contacts Moving cover monitoring Yes de synchronization gt 400 ms Sensitive conveyor No monitoring Bi manual control No EN 954 1 category 4 External module power supply Voltage 24 VDC A1 A2 terminal Residual ripple 5 Voltage limit 15 20 F1 fuse external supply lt 1A gL protection according to IEC 947 5 1 Maximum consumption 200 mA Check threshold lt 19 VDC Maximum current call 0 5A 5ms Safety circuit voltage 24 VDC Module protection Internal electronic fuse gt 250 mA and lt 1A Insulation Over voltage category II 2 kV pollution degree 2 PLC supply current consumed with internal 5 V supply 150 mA Power dissipated in the module lt 5W Dimensions HxWxD 150 x 36 x 120 mm Weight 0 49 kg MTBF Module 3 x 10 failures hour Relay card 0 5 x 10 fa
288. ring Parameter of a Discrete Input Module How to modify the Fallback Mode Parameter of a Discrete Output Module How to modify the Output Reactivation Parameter of a Discrete Module 372 375 376 377 378 379 380 382 383 385 387 389 390 391 394 395 396 399 401 401 403 404 404 407 408 410 411 412 413 414 415 417 418 419 35010512 07 2011 Chapter 35 Description of the Discrete Specific Application 35 1 35 2 Chapter 36 Chapter 37 Chapter 38 38 1 38 2 Language Objects 00 ee cece ee eee eee Language Objects and IODDT 0 00 cee eee e eee Description of the Discrete Function Objects Languages Implicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application Specific UNCON e eaeoe ar a deed wed verge lta bdo ae ode Explicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application Specific Functions es es seb 8h eh eects ere Bw eras ved a dene eae ea Management of Exchanges and Reports with Explicit Objects IODDTs of the Discrete modules 0000 cece eee ence Details about T_DIS_IN_GEN Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange Details about T_DIS_IN_STD Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange Details about T_DIS_IN_STD Type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange Details about T_DIS_EVT Type IODDT Implicit Object Exchange Details about T_DIS_EVT Type IODDT Explicit Object Exchange Details about T_DIS_OUT_GEN
289. ription of safety modules General The TSX PAY 2 2 safety modules and their accessories TSX CPP 301 02 and TELEFAST 2 ABE 7CPA 13 are used to interrupt one or several category 0 safety or emergency stop control circuits safety components in complete safety The entire safety system is compliant with European standards EN 418 for emergency stops and EN 60204 1 for safety circuits These modules also comply with safety requirements regarding the electrical monitoring of position switches activated by protection devices The TSX PAY 2 2 safety modules provide e A safety system designed to control the emergency stop circuits of machines in complete safety The modules are equipped with a wired logic safety block for monitoring emergency stops e Full diagnostics of the safety system readable from the status of the position switches and push buttons of the emergency stop input sequence the reactivation input the feedback loop the control of both output circuits and the safety system power supply status All this information is sent to the PLC s CPU in the form of 28 bit Discrete inputs NOTE The PLC has no effect on the safety modules and the safety system section is connected to an external power supply 35010512 07 2011 345 Implementing safety modules Physical description of the safety modules Introduction The TSX PAY 2 2 modules are in standard Premium PLC interface format They occupy a single slot
290. roup of channels e value1 value2 correspond to the function parameters applied to the output Timer PWM Counter Example Modification of parameters of channel 18 value1 10 ms 100 x 0 1 ms value2 500 ms 5000 x 0 1 ms MOD_PARAM CHxy 16 2 100 5000 0 35010512 07 2011 521 Installation of the discrete reflex module 522 35010512 07 2011 Glossary AS i Channel group CPU Discrete Fipio A Actuator Sensor interface C Channels of the same type with common parameters This notion concerns certain application specific modules such as discrete modules Central Processing Unit generic name used for Schneider Electric processors D Discrete I Os F Field bus used to connect sensor or actuator type devices 35010512 07 2011 523 Glossary IODDT IP67 Momentum PV TBX TSX PCI57 Atrium Unity Pro Input Output Derived Data Type Family of Schneider Electric hardware products consisting of sealed I O modules which connect to the FIPIO field bus used to produce automated systems with distributed I Os M I O modules using several open standard communication networks P Identifier indicating the product version T I O modules remoted on the FIPIO bus Families of Schneider Electric hardware products U Programming software of Schneider Electric PLCs 524 35010512 07 2011 Index A ABE 7H08R10 266 AB
291. rrent of the idle output to ensure that the following inequation is satisfied nominal gt 50 x leakage given that nominal current consumed by the pre actuator leakage leakage current in idle output state e Compatibility of tungsten filament lamps and transistor outputs static current e for outputs with protection against short circuits the maximum power of the tungsten filament lamps specified in the table of characteristics must be complied with If not the lamp s pick up current might cause a tripped output at the time of power up e Compatibility of AC pre actuators and relay outputs e Inductive AC pre actuators have a pick up current of up to 10 times their holding current for a duration of 2 F seconds F alternating current frequency Relay outputs are therefore set to withstand these conditions AC14 and AC15 The table of characteristics for relay outputs gives the maximum authorized running power in AV according to the number of operations 4 CAUTION THERMAL CURRENT OVERHEATING RELAY Do not use a relay for currents exceeding its defined thermal current capability Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage e Compatibility of lamps and bidirectional triode thyristor outputs e ensure that the maximum power is equal to U x max 35010512 07 2011 53 Discrete general implementation rules e Compatibility of AC pre actuators with rel
292. s 8 channel bases Compact 12 12 and 16 channel bases and 16 channel bases Illustration TELEFAST 2 base TELEFAST 2 base Description with 1 with 1 with 1 fuse 1 isolator channel isolator channel isolator channel 1 for inputs 2 for outputs 35010512 07 2011 253 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration The principle for identifying the connection interface bases for 8 12 16 channel discrete I Os is as follows ABE 7H e 4 3 2 1 Description The table below describes the different elements which make it possible to identify the connection interface bases for 8 12 16 channel discrete I Os Number Description 1 08 8 channel base 12 12 channel base 16 16 channel base 2 Primary function e R simple connection e S isolator channel e F fuse channel 3 1 with 1 screw terminal per channel on 1 level 2 with 2 screw terminals per channel on 2 levels 3 with 3 screw terminals per channel on 3 levels 4 with 2 screw terminals per channel on 1 level 5 with 1 screw terminal per channel on 2 levels 4 0 or even number without LED display per channel odd number with LED display per channel 254 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Catalog The table below shows the catalog of bases for connection and adaptation interfaces for inputs with
293. s 24 W 6 Minimum switchable 1mA 5V load Response time Activation lt 8ms Deactivation lt 10 ms Type of contact normally open 35010512 07 2011 197 TSX DSY 16R5 Built in protection against short circuits and overloads None compulsory installation of a quick blow fuse on every channel or channel group against inductive overloads with alternating current None compulsory installation in parallel to the terminals of each pre actuator of a RC circuit or MOV ZNO peak limiter appropriate to the voltage in use against inductive overloads with direct current None compulsory installation of a discharge diode at the terminals of each pre actuator Dissipated power 12 0 25 W 0 2 x Nb W Dielectric strength Output ground or Output internal logic 2000 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Power supply consumption 5V Typical 80 mA internal Maximum 90 mA 24 V relay Typical 8 5 mA 13 Maximum 10 mA 0 1 x 10 maneuvers 0 15 x 10 maneuvers 0 3 x 10 maneuvers 0 5 x 108 maneuvers 0 7 x 10 maneuvers 1 x 10 maneuvers 1 5 x 10 maneuvers 2 x 10 maneuvers 3 x 10 maneuvers 5 x 10 maneuvers 10 x 10 maneuvers Nb number of outputs at 1 Per channel at 1 198 35010512 07 2011
294. s it is necessary to use auxiliary relays with mechanically linked contacts cf T lem canique safety applications components catalogue this constitutes self checking of outputs The NF contacts of relays K3 and K4 must be looped back into the feedback loop in series between terminals Y1 and Y2 This wiring prevents the safety system from being reactivated when one of the two control relays K3 or K4 sticks Internal module faults In the event of the failure of an internal component the safety modules continue to perform safety functions by opening the output contacts K1 K2 directly or when they are next activated opening an ES PB or PS or powering down If this occurs it is impossible to close output contacts K1 K2 It is then advisable to change the module Where such a fault causes over consumption on the 24 VDC a limit of 750 mA is imposed In this case the bit Ix 27 indicating the status of the safety system switches to 0 and the fault is signaled 380 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Ground faults Limitations The safety modules have been built to comply with EN60204 1 which deals specifically with short circuits to ground Given that the 0 VDC is grounded the consequences of one or several short circuits to ground can be e the short circuiting of one or more of the ES PBs to the negative pole where double contacts are in use The outputs open on activation of an ES PB or PS by
295. s Yes Yes ABE 7H16F43 Yes Yes ABE 7H16843 Yes Yes Yes Yes Input adapter connection bases 16 channels ABE 7S16E2 Yes Yes Yes Yes ABE 7P16F3 ee Yes Yes Yes Yes Output adapter connection bases 8 channels ABE 7S08S2 Yes 1 Yes 1 l ABE 7RO8Seee Yes 1 Yes 1 l 35010512 07 2011 259 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os TSX Discrete I O modules and modularity DEY 16FK DEY 32D2K DEY 32D3K DSY 32T2K DMY 28FK DEY 64D2K DSY 64T2K DMY 28RFK 1x 161 2x161 4x16l 2x161 2x160 4x160 1x16I 1x120 TELEFAST 2 connection bases 16 channels ABE 7R16Seee Yes Yes ABE 7R16Teee Yes Yes ABE 7P16Teee Yes Yes Legend 1 With 16 to 2 x 8 channel adapter ABE 7ACCO02 2 With ABE 7H16R20 connection base only 260 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 2 Connection Principles for the TELEFAST 2 Interfaces for Discrete I O Aim of this section This section describes the connection principles for the TELEFAST 2 products for discrete input output modules What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Connecting a Discrete I O module to a TELEFAST 2 base interface 262 Dimensions and Mounting of the TELEFAST 2 Connection Bases 263 35010512 07
296. s and non mounted screws 1 Dimension with additional shunt terminal block ABE 7BV20 or ABE 7BV10 264 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os The illustration below shows the dimensions in mm of the products ABE 7R16T3ee and ABE 7P16T3e 83 74 272 ll ee ee S gas 15 Reference measuring 272 x 88 mm product shown has removable relays and non mounted screws 1 Dimension with additional shunt terminal block ABE 7BV20 or ABE 7BV10 Mounting The TELEFAST 2 bases are mounted on 35 mm wide DIN mounting rails A WARNING UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Install the input adaptation bases ABE 7S16E2E1 and static output adaptation bases ABE 7SeeS2Be lengthways and horizontally to prevent the device from overheating and unexpected operation Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 35010512 07 2011 265 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 3 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7H08R10 08R11 and ABE 7H16R10 16R11 Connection Bases Sensor and Pre actuator Connections on the ABE 7H08R10 R11 and ABE 7H16R10 R11 Bases At a Glance Thi
297. s is an overview of the sensor and pre actuator connections on TELEFAST 2 bases NOTE The bases are manufactured with a general purpose quick blow fuse rated 6 3 A To guarantee optimum protection this fuse should be rated according to the application connection to input or output functions and the maximum current allowable in the base Type and rating of fuse to be fitted to the base e input functions 0 5 A quick blow e output functions e 2A quick blow on the ABE 7H16Ree base e 6 3 A quick blow on the ABE 7HO8Ree base Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks s24VDC OVDG ABE HOBRIT 424VDG CHI CHO OVDG ABE7HISR 16 Digital Inputs Outputs CHO CH 8 Digtal O x ha 0123456789 101 12 131415 MB 177779 Seed P RETO LTTE T Se fe a EH gl EH E S Ao S5SSSS SESSSHENG S NO S8SS8SS8S85 on 266 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Connections for input and output functions Module and sensor supply Module and pre T DE actuator supply DE PPR Ria eNews E VDC VDC voe voc ABE ABE ABE ABE 7HO8R10 11 7H16R10 1 7HO8R10M1 7HI6RIONI az 5 2 85 5 e gt TT y 1 Ws aay eee fe mi sensors j j pre actuators w wo fo N oO gt N O T T D T Cc Cc Cc G Cc Cc E c Cc Cc E a Cc E oO oO oO oO oO oO oO oO c lt lt coy c c coy c lt O Oo O O O Oo O O
298. s reading for the channel in progress MWr m c 0 0 CMD_IN_PROGR BOOL R Command parameters exchange in progress MWr m c 0 1 ADJ_IN_PROGR BOOL R Adjust parameters exchange in progress MWr m c 0 2 Explicit exchange report EXCH_RPT The table below shows EXCH RPT MWr m c 1 report bit meanings Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number STS_ERR BOOL R Channel status word reading error 1 failure MWr m c 1 0 CMD_ERR BOOL R Error during command parameter exchange MWr m c 1 1 1 failure ADJ_ERR BOOL R Fault at the time of a adjusting parameter MWr m c 1 2 exchange Standard channel faults CH_FLT The table below shows the CH_FLT MWr m c 2 status word bit meanings The reading is performed by aREAD STS IODDT_ VAR1 Standard symbol Type Access _ Meaning Number TRIP BOOL R External error Tripped MWr m c 2 0 FUSE BOOL R External error Fuse MWr m c 2 1 BLK BOOL R Terminal block error MWr m c 2 2 444 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Standard symbol Type Access _ Meaning Number EXT_PS FLT BOOL R External supply fault MWr m c 2 3 INTERNAL FLT BOOL R Internal error H S module MWr m c 2 4 CONF_FLT BOOL R Hardware or software configuration error MWr m c 2 5 COM_FLT BOOL R Problem communicating with the PLC MWr m c 2 6 SHORT_CIRCUIT BOOL R External error Short circuit on a chan
299. se Sensor connections on ABE 7P16F310 static input relay base width 12 5 mm At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16F310 base 16 relay outputs potential free contact relays not provided Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC AEE OVDG ABE P16F310 16 Relay Inputs thay 1xx PLC Fuse l 1Amax fay 2XX I I I I L p I fi I I J I I I 0 1 2 B 4 6 6 7 B 9 10 1 12 14 15 SS88eSS S988 CSS80SS9 SSCSSOSS SSSCSS CELSO rog Dgo Lo tro LL N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base col TSXe module outputs 1 A fast blow ry 20 l i LL NBS SYG ABE 7P16F310 100 201 15 200 101 215 gt 7 J a 4 24 240 VAC or i 5 127 VDC gt sensors gt p AE nanna Channel 15 Channel 0 NOTE Provide one protection fuse per group of sensors if supplied from the same voltage
300. sent and unacknowledged by Acq t2i flashes slowly fault not present and acknowledged by Acq e lit up fault present and acknowledged by Acq e out last fault cleared by the Eff input after acknowledgement 35010512 07 2011 519 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the Fault Signaling function with tli lt t2i Def Acq Eff 2x tli gt 2x tii i 2 x t2i 520 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module 38 4 Modification of internal values using MOD_PARAM Modification of the internal values using MOD_PARAM function Presentation Other than the standard instructions the TSX DMY 28 RFK module also uses a specific instruction MOD_PARAM see Unity Pro Drive control Block Library Modify parameters which enables the parameters associated with a single channel to be modified NOTE In order to avoid several simultaneous explicit exchanges for the same index of channels it is necessary to test the value of the word EXCH_STS of the IODDT see page 444 Syntax MOD_PARAM CHxy i no value1 value2 0 where e i 16 or 24 index of the first channel of a group of 8 channels e no 0 to 7 index of the channel in the g
301. sing edge of input E e time out t1i masking time is launched e input x changes to 1 2 When time out t1 has elapsed and then on each edge of input a FB time out t2i is launched If the rising edges of input FB are spaced out at interval t2i e output x changes to 0 e output x Aux changes to 1 signaling end of movement If input E changes to 0 outputs x and x Aux change to 0 508 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the speed detection function block E tli i l FB tetai tetai t lt t2i tai gt t tt x x Aux 35010512 07 2011 509 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Speed monitoring Role This function is used to control or halt an action according to two thresholds t1i and t2i Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration E Enable function input FB Control input Xx Block s physical output x Aux Speed control output _ slow speed detection 2 I Output x FB t2i Output x Aux Sae RTENE Application example Activation of a conveyor belt upstream controlled by the x Aux input depending on the speed of a conveyor belt downstr
302. sistive Voltage 24V 48 V DC12 Power 24W 6 50W 6 z 50 W 3 100 W 3 Inductive Voltage 24V 48 V DC13 UR Power 1ow s 24Ww 8 t 60 ms 24W 6 50W 6 Response time Activation lt 10ms Deactivation lt 15ms Type of contact 12 2x20 C 2x2C Built in protection against over voltage R C and Ge Mov circuit against short circuits and 6 3 A interchangeable quick blow fuse per common overloads Dissipated power 13 0 25 W 0 24 x Nb W Dielectric strength Output ground or Output 2000 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min internal logic 35010512 07 2011 191 TSX DSY 08R5A Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Power supply consumption 5V Typical 55 mA Maximum 65 mA 24 V relay 14 Typical 10 mA Maximum 12 mA Legend 1 0 1 x 108 maneuvers 2 0 15 x 10 maneuvers 3 0 3 x 10 maneuvers 4 0 5 x 10 maneuvers 5 0 7 x 108 maneuvers 6 1 x 10 maneuvers 7 1 5 x 10 maneuvers 8 2 x 10 maneuvers 9 3 x 10 maneuvers 10 5 x 10 maneuvers 11 10 x 10 maneuvers 12 O open idle C closed operation 13 Nb number of outputs at 1 14 Per channel at 1 192 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08R5A Connecting the TSX DSY 08R5A module At a Glance The TSX DSY 08R5A module comprises 8 prote
303. so oO oO oO oO Fl at x om f x O O oO O O NOTE Provide one protection fuse per actuator or per group if fed from the same voltage Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit in the case of alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 320 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 26 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T215 connection base Actuator connections on ABE 7P16T215 electromechanical or static output relay bases size 10 mm At a Glance This is an overview of the actuator connections on the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T215 base 16 relay outputs 1 F distribution of 2 polarities per group of 8 channels 1 fuse per channel relay not provided Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC OvDC J T l plo else lA Atia ABE 7 P16T215 ae 6 Relay Outputs as a a ouy a a ao A a2 a3 a4 q5 l JERENSZEASZBRER5 ng8gS gS SETI TS
304. stics of the TSX DSY 1684 module The TSX DSY 16S4 module Bidirectional triode thyristor outputs Threshold service voltage Direct prohibited Alternating 20 132 V Admissible current channel 1A see page 77 module 12A Leakage current lt 1 5 mA Response time Activation lt 10 ms Deactivation lt 10 ms Built in protection against over voltage R C and Ge Mov circuit against short circuits and overloads 10 A non interchangeable fireproof protection per common Dissipated power 0 5 W 1 W per A and per output Dielectric strength Output ground or Output internal logic 2000 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC 5 V supply consumption Typical 220 mA Maximum 230 mA 35010512 07 2011 215 TSX DSY 1684 Connecting the TSX DSY 16S4 module At a Glance The TSX DSY 16S4 module comprises 16 bidirectional triode thyristor output channels This module is equipped with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to be connected Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an output is shown below ee MOG O Err l A i Output n ies p p Ya A i 24 120 VAC ULN gt i Fu supply of Module Pre actuator 216 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 1684 Module connection The diagram below shows the connection of the mo
305. t Objects 427 422 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Description of the Discrete Function Objects Languages General information The Discrete modules have different IODDT groups The IODDTs are predefined by the manufacturer they contain input output languages objects belonging to a channel of a specific application module There are six IODDT types for the Discrete T DIS _IN GEN T DIS _IN STD T DIS EVT T DIS OUT GEN T DIS OUT STD T DIS OUT REFLEX specific for the TSX DMY 28RFK reflex discrete module NOTE IODDT variables can be created in two different ways e Using the I O objects see Unity Pro Operating Modes tab e Data Editor see Unity Pro Operating Modes Language objects types In each IODDT is a set of language objects permitting the control and verification of their operation There are two types of language objects e Implicit Exchanges Objects which are automatically exchanged at each cycle pass of the task associated to the module e Explicit Exchanges Objects which are exchanged upon demand from the application while using explicit exchange instructions Implicit exchanges concern the module s inputs outputs Measurement information and operation results Explicit exchanges enable module configuration and diagnosis 35010512 07 2011 423 Language Objects Implicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application Specific Function
306. t and output fallback mode available only on some Discrete modules Configuration zone Enables the configuration of parameters for the various channels This field includes various items displayed according to the selected Discrete module The Symbol column displays the symbol associated with the channel when it has been defined by the user using the variable editor 406 35010512 07 2011 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application 34 2 Discrete Input and Output Track Parameters Aim of this Section This section presents the various parameters of input and output track for discrete modules What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Discrete Input Parameters on the Rack 408 Discrete Output Parameters for 8 Channel Modules in Rack 410 Over 8 track modules on rack Discrete Output Parameter for Modules with 411 more than 8 Channels on the Rack 35010512 07 2011 407 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application Discrete Input Parameters on the Rack At a Glance The Discrete input module includes parameters by channel by group of 8 or 16 consecutive channels Parameters The following table displays the parameters available for each in rack Discrete input module Reference module No of inputs Associated task Function Filter On Power 8 channel group __ by channel
307. t2i tti x Aux_ L 506 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Characteristics Frequency and Duty Cycle This table describes the characteristics of the PWM function block Characteristic Value Time Base 0 1 ms F max 2 KHz t1i period 0 1 5 to 65535 t2i time on 0 1 2 to 65534 This table describes the frequency and the duty cycle range ti Frequency Step Number of steps Duty Cycle min Duty Cycle max 5 2 KHz 20 4 20 80 10 1 KHz 10 9 10 90 100 100 Hz 1 99 1 99 1000 10 Hz 0 1 999 0 1 99 9 10000 1 Hz 0 01 9999 0 01 99 99 65535 0 15 Hz 0 0015 65534 0 0015 99 9985 35010512 07 2011 507 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Detection of underspeed Role This function is used to halt an action after a start phase t1i masking if the time elapsing between two consecutive pulses is higher than t2i Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration E Enable function input FB Control input _E Slow speed detection 1 Je Qubyt x x Block s physical output tli x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output FB 12 Oupa Aux bee irae Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the speed detection Phase Description 1 On the ri
308. te 2 Pivot the terminal block so as to bring it to the engaged position on the module 3 Tighten the fastening screws of the upper section of the terminal block so as to firmly attach the terminal block to the module torque setting 2 0 N m Note The first time a screw terminal block is mounted on a module which takes this type of connection the terminal block is coded according to the type of module on which it is assembled Coding is performed by transferring two encoded pins from the module to the terminal block This mechanical coding then inhibits any use of the terminal block with a different module type The code is transferred automatically during step 1 34 35010512 07 2011 Discrete general implementation rules Identification of Discrete I O Modules with Screw Terminal Block Connections At a Glance Illustration Discrete I O modules with screw terminal block connection are identified by the markings on the lid of the front section of the module and the labels located on the terminal block The following diagram illustrates the identification of the Discrete I O modules with screw terminal block connection TSX DEY 16D2 1 161 24 VDC IEC type 2 I 2 TSX DEY 16D2 16 Current Sinking Inputs 24VDC IEC type 2 10 ZE 4 5 le
309. te When stringing together several blocks it is essential to change the statuses of the Sel and Direct inputs only when the status of input E is set to 0 Illustration The table below shows the tracking of the two monostables E 2 values MONO Quip x E 2values MONO m Oui xT Set tti Set tli Direct t2i Output x Aux Direct t2i Output x Aux 35010512 07 2011 493 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Oscillator This function enables a time base to be created with the option of defining the signal parameters status 0 or 1 The table below shows the block s different interfaces Meaning Illustration Oscillator input i i OSCILLATOR Output x Oscillator s physical output JOSGLLATOR f ne CMS Se Block s internal auxiliary output t2i Output x Aux Sere This table describes the different operating phases of the oscillator Description On the rising edge of input E e output x oscillates for period t1i t2i where e tii length of high status of oscillation time base of 0 1ms t2i length of low status of oscillation time base of 0 1ms e output x Aux changes to 1 On the falling edge of input E e output x changes to 0 as soon as t1i for the current period is over e the x output changes to 0 when the current period is over Role Structure Name E X x Aux Operation Phase 1
310. ted for the c input channel track Error Bit The following table presents the CH_ERROR lr m c ERR bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number CH_ERROR BOOL R Indicates that c input channel is at fault lr m c ERR Event flag EVT_STS The following table shows 1 EVT STS lWr m c 0 word bit meanings Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number RE_EVT BOOL R Indicate that event processing is configured for lWr m c 0 0 positive transition FE_EVT BOOL R Indicate that event processing is configured for lWr m c 0 1 negative transition Event flag EVT_MASK The following table presents the EVT_STS lr m c bit meaning Standard symbol Type Access Meaning Number EVT_MASK BOOL R W Enables you to mask unmask the event assigned QWr m c 0 0 to the channel 436 35010512 07 2011 Language Objects Details about T_DIS_EVT Type lODDT Explicit Object Exchange At a Glance This section shows the IODDT of type T_ DIS EVT explicit exchange objects that are valid for Discrete event input modules It regroups word type objects which bits have a particular meaning These objects are explained in detail below Example of declaring a variable IODDT_VARI1 of type T_DIS_EVT NOTE Generally bit meaning is provided for state 1 of that bit In specific cases each bit state is explained NOTE Not all bits
311. the relevant instructions must be followed Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in injury harm or improper operating results Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage 2011 Schneider Electric All rights reserved 35010512 07 2011 Table of Contents Part Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Safety Information 0 cece eee eee About the Book 2 0 00 cece eee Hardware installation of the Discrete I O modules General overview of discrete I O modules General description of the Discrete I O modules Physical description of Discrete modules with screw terminal block CONNMCCHON 2 e ar a E E E A E E Se a eee PR ee es Physical description of Discrete modules with HE10 connectors Catalog of Discrete input modules 00 e cece eee eee Catalog of Discrete output modules 000 eee eee Catalog of Discrete mixed I O modules 2000000 eee General rules for implementing Discrete I O modules Fitting of Discrete I O Modules 0 000 cece eee eee eee Fitting a screw terminal block to a Discrete I O module Identification of Discrete I O Modules with Screw Terminal Block ConnectiONs sopesar iene Genet wih vig eed ee dee Si E EE Identification of Discrete I O Modules with HE10 Connectors Choice of direct curre
312. the maximum current allowable in the base Type and rating of fuse to be fitted to the base e input functions 0 5 A quick blow e output functions 6 3 A quick blow on the ABE 7H12R50 base Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 724 VOC OVOG ABE THT2R50 H H 2 Digital O Bt phe i13 57 91 SPE joj 476 8 ioj p HE E Fuse 280 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Connections for input and output functions Module and sensor Module and pre actuator i supply i supply aleek cine aoe 24 0 24 0 voc voc voc voc ABE ABE 7H12R50 7H12R50 MZ QUQ Mr KRRQ Qa H O 0 90 a Q 2 a o o l 0 0 Oo Q o 0 0 4 oS OOo oOo O o Ojo N N N N E fi H iil t l U 74 7 sensors j j j pre actuators Or OTN KR OD E orn YOR OOF oo o oo OD OO o ooo oo o OOD cc cece a ae cece co G ceo c i C Se fa EEC G CE C CcC C CCE co SC OG OO OG oo S co CG DG SS ES Re ibe ee e ofl S p e a R o a 00 0 00 0 OO O OOO 00 0 00 0 Connecting the common for sensors e onto terminals 1 or 2 sensors to the o
313. tinued TSX PAY 262 2 outputs Mast Fast TSX PAY 282 4 outputs AUXi Legend 1 Reactivation is selected globally for the 12 output channels NOTE The parameters in bold correspond to the parameters configured by default 35010512 07 2011 411 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application 34 3 Configuration of discrete parameters Subject of this section This section presents the installation of different discrete I O channel configuration parameters What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page How to Modify the Task parameter of a Discrete module 413 How to Modify the External Power Supply Error Monitoring Parameter of a 414 Discrete Module How to Modify the Function Parameter of a Discrete Input Module 415 How to Modify the Filtering Parameter of a Discrete Input Module 417 How to modify the Fallback Mode Parameter of a Discrete Output Module 418 How to modify the Output Reactivation Parameter of a Discrete Module 419 412 35010512 07 2011 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application How to Modify the Task parameter of a Discrete module At a Glance This parameter defines the processor task where input acquisitions and output updates are performed The task is defined for 8 consecutive channels in the case of on rack Discrete modules Possible choices are e
314. tion and the catalog of Discrete transistor output modules with HE10 connectors The following table provides a catalog of transistor Discrete output modules with screw terminal block connection Type of module Transistor outputs with screw terminal block connection Illustration Discrete output Discrete output Discrete output Discrete output Discrete output module module module module module Number of 8 outputs 16 outputs channels Range 24 VDC 48 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC Insulation Insulated outputs Current 0 5A 2A 1A 0 5 A 0 25 A IEC 1131 2 Yes compliance Protection Outputs protected against short circuits and overloads with automatic or controlled reactivation and with fast electromagnet demagnetization circuits Fallback Configurable fallback of outputs permanent monitoring of output control and reset of outputs in the event of detection of an internal fault Logic Positive Response time 1 ms 0 2 ms 0 3 ms ims ims Connections Screw terminal block TSXee reference DSY 08T2 DSY 08T22 DSY 08T31 DSY 16T2 DSY 16T3 number 35010512 07 2011 25 Discrete general overview Catalog The following table provides a catalog of relay Discrete output modules with screw terminal block connection Type of module Relay outputs with screw terminal block connection Illustration Discr
315. to the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit in the case of alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 324 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 28 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T332 P16T332 connection bases Actuator connections on ABE 7R16T332 P16T332 electromechanical output relay bases size 12 5 mm At a Glance This is a description of the actuator connections on e the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7R16T332 base 16 relay outputs 1 OF distribution of the 2 polarities by 4 channel group with electromagnetic relay e the TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T332 base 16 relay outputs 1 OF distribution of the 2 polarities by 4 channel group relays not provided Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 2406 OC OvDC pce Fist Amex ABE7 RI6T332 16 Relay Outputs E FAAEE a Q c2 a 4 06 a7 ce eio Q a12 fa 3 aid 15 BS Be G5 THI Sg SS Ss BS BE SS SS L EEEE SE SES Ses eens ee r EI I eer a
316. topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX DSY 08R5A module 190 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R5A module 191 Connecting the TSX DSY 08R5A module 193 35010512 07 2011 189 TSX DSY 08R5A Presentation of the TSX DSY 08R5A module General The TSX DSY 08R5A module The TSX DSY 08R5A module is an 8 channel terminal block Discrete relay output module for 5 A thermal current This module features protection of contacts by interchangeable fuses see page 183 190 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 08R5A Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R5A module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R5A module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R5A module The TSX DSY 08R5A module 5 A thermal current relay outputs Threshold service Direct 19 60 V voltage see page 77 Alternating 19 264 V Thermal current 5A Maximum current per common 6 A value not to be exceeded Alternating current load Resistive Voltage 24V 48 V 100 120 V 200 240 V AC12 Power 100 VA 5 100 VA 6 220VA 6 440 VA 6 200 VA 4 440 VA 4 Inductive Voltage 24V 48 V 100 120 V 200 240 V E and Power 50 VA 4 20VA 10 20VA 11 20VA 11 2 50VA 8 110VA 7 110 VA 9 220 VA 2 220 VA 6 440 VA 1 Direct current load Re
317. tp Ge Sa ds CA 0171 0162 os 1 66 0161 0152 1 fine epee na ne ees ee ee ae tes aE oia RS oe ca cpg Sa dees 8 0151 0142 NON Go nes os at Be cae GO 0141 0132 A ee os iar teal J 0131 0122 34 0121 nm 0121 6 T1 TELEFAST terminals 35010512 07 2011 373 Implementing safety modules Single contact This wiring is not suitable for applications requiring category 3 or 4 compliant levels of safety Not all errors are detected nor are ES PB or PS short circuits Here pressing this PB will not cause the safety circuits to open loss of the safety function 63 001 9 0112 023 q Go 0232 0o22 q G 0231 0222 021 a 0221 0212 O20 q 16 0211 0202 o19 q 18 0201 0192 018 gel 0182 0191 O17 q 0181 0172 O16 qui 0171 0162 015 qu 26 0161 0152 014 qe 8 0151 0142 013 q G 0141 0132 0o12 q 0131 0122 0121 8 0232 G9 T1 TELEFAST terminals NOTE If less than 12 contacts are being used the input terminals that are not in use must be bridged Example Contact S18 not in use Bridge the following terminals S172 S181 and S182 S191 O 63 001 LS 0112 i 10 0232 ee a w 3 0231 0222 EE 14 0221 0212 020 gui 16 0211 0202 arii 0201 0192 0 0182 0191 018 ETA A 0181 0172 oiea 4 0171 0162 Gig debs 6 0161 0152 EE 0151 0142 bls ieas 60 0141 0132
318. tput lt Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the type 2 command check function Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input Cde time out tti is launched input x changes to 1 2 When time out t1i is over e ifthe Ctrl1 signal changes to status 1 during time out interval tli the x Aux input stays at O normal situation e ifthe Ctrl1 signal is not received the x Aux output changes to 1 type A error signal e if the Ctrl1 signal falls back while the Cde input is at 1 the x Aux output changes to 1 type B error signal The x Aux input is set to 0 in the event of e arising edge on input Acq with input Ctrl1 at 1 e change of status of input Cde 3 On the falling edge of input Cde time out t2i is launched input x changes to 0 35010512 07 2011 515 Installation of the discrete reflex module Phase Description 4 When time out t2i is over e if the Ctrl2 signal changes to status 1 during time out interval t2i the x Aux input stays at O normal situation e ifthe Ctrl2 signal is not received the x Aux output changes to 1 type A error signal e if the Ctrl2 signal falls back while the Cde input is at 0 the x Aux output changes to 1 type B error signal The x Aux input is set to 0 in the event of e arising edge on input Acq with input Ctrl2 at 1 e change of status of input Cde
319. tration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC cyovbc ABE7 R16T330 16 Relay Outputs Ql 1 INIA mm M N ho at tt lO O ON ON NN ON M N ABE 7R16T330 P16T330 16 output relays 1 OF potential free contact ABE 7R16T330 with electromagnetic relays ABE 7P16T330 relays not provided 35010512 07 2011 323 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Supply for ABE 7 base and Output connection functions Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base TSXe module outputs 1 A fast blow r 1 24 0 WC vwe q ABE 7R16T330 ABE 7P16T330 Qal4 a5 I f JA 200 1201 214 1215 300 100 301 10 3144 14 315 115 L D if fot Actuator 24 240 VCA or 5 127vDC 77 gt 4 h i fat T T T T i fet E Cc E Cc oO oO o oO coy x x coy OS oO O O NOTE Provide one protection fuse per actuator or per group if fed from the same voltage Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted on
320. tration The illustration below shows the timing chart for the 2 threshold Counter function block RESET l l Sel E Up th2 m pe el l x x Aux 500 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Single electronic CAM Role This function is used to detect when the two thresholds th1 and th2 have been crossed Structure The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning E Enable input e E 0 Up input frozen e E 1 Up input valid Up Counting input Note the maximum performance of the counter is 2 Khz with the Up input directly controlled by the physical input without filtering RESET 0 Output x forced to 0 RESET 1 Counter initialization input Note If the counter is not reset to 0 when it reaches the maximum value 65536 points it will change to 0 1 2 etc Therefore it is advisable to inhibit counting E 0 by using the x Aux output in series with output E xX Cam s physical output x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output Illustration _ ingle electronic CAM Qupa x th Output x Aux tao at lt ace 35010512 07 2011 501 Installation of the discrete reflex module Operation This table describes the different operating phases of the simple cam Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of in
321. ule Characteristics The following table shows the characteristics of the alternating voltage TSX DEY 16A2 module The TSX DEY 16A2 module 24 VAC alternating voltage inputs Nominal input values Voltage 24 VAC Current 15mA Frequency 50 60 Hz Threshold input values at 1 Voltage 210V Current 26 mA for U 10 V at 0 Voltage SV Current lt 4 mA Frequency 47 63 HZ Sensor supply 20 26 V Peak current at activation 15 mA at nominal U Input impedance at nominal U 1 6 kOhms Response time Activation 15 ms Deactivation 20 ms IEC 1131 2 compliance type 2 2 wire 3 wire proximity sensor compatibility see page 50 IEC 947 5 2 Dielectric strength Input ground or Input 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min internal logic Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Type of input Resistive Sensor voltage check threshold OK gt 18 V Error lt 14V Check response time on appearance 20 ms lt T lt 50 ms on disappearance 5ms lt T lt 15ms 5 V consumption typical 80 mA maximum 90 mA 35010512 07 2011 89 TSX DEY 16A2 Sensor supply consumption 1 typical 15 mA 15 x Nb mA maximum 19 mA 15 x Nb mA Dissipated power 1 1 W 0 35 x Nb W Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of inputs set to 1 Legend 1 Nb number of channels at 1
322. ule configuration screen 2 For the desired channel group click on the arrow of the Reactivate drop down menu of the General parameters zone Result A drop down list appears Reactivate Automatic Choose the desired reactivation Confirm the modification with the Edit Validate menu command 35010512 07 2011 419 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application 420 35010512 07 2011 Description of the Discrete Specific Application Language Objects 35 Aim of this Chapter This chapter describes the language objects associated with Discrete specific applications from various IODDT What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 35 1 Language Objects and IODDT 422 35 2 IODDTs of the Discrete modules 431 35010512 07 2011 421 Language Objects 35 1 Language Objects and IODDT Aim of this section This section provides general information about language objects and IODDTs for Discrete What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Description of the Discrete Function Objects Languages 423 Implicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application Specific 424 Function Explicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application Specific 425 Function Management of Exchanges and Reports with Explici
323. ules A DANGER LOSS OF THE ABILITY TO PERFORM SAFETY FUNCTIONS The TSX CPP 02 module connection cable is part of the safety system Do not modify this cable Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Connections The following table presents the correspondence between the safety module and the TELEFAST screw terminal blocks Marking TELEFAST screw Marking TELEFAST screw terminal block terminal block Al 37 8122 8131 32 A2 Y4 1 3 8132 141 30 B1 39 8142 8151 28 S01 33 152 S161 26 02 S11 31 162 S171 24 12 S21 29 172 S181 22 22 S31 27 182 S191 20 32 S41 25 192 S201 18 42 S51 23 202 S211 16 52 S61 21 212 S221 14 62 S71 19 222 S231 12 72 S81 17 232 10 38 82 S91 15 33 Y2 5 7 92 S101 13 34 6 102 S111 11 Y1 8 S112 9 Y3 4 121 34 40 GND 2 35 36 NOTE The TELEFAST ABE 7CPA13 and TSX CPP 02 cable are not supplied with the safety module 368 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Wiring examples L2 The following diagram shows the wiring of 5 emergency stops with reactivation surveillance J er Ge Ta 511 502 er at oe 21 512 i A 1 31 S22 S411532 I er S511342 112 Do not y connect wo 34 33 2 y1 222 8171 5162 5161 5152 8151 5142 5141 5132 8131 5122 121 ABE7 CPA 13 Status of inputs Y1 Y2 Feedback loop 33 S34 Op
324. unter initialized to 0 input x changes to 0 Counter increases at the rate of time base ti When threshold th is reached output x changes to 1 On the falling edge of input E with output x at 1 output x Aux changes to 1 35010512 07 2011 503 Installation of the discrete reflex module Illustration The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the intervalometer function block E RESET 1 Time base th sr Pe N x Aux 504 35010512 07 2011 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Burst Role Structure Operation Illustration This function is used to generate a pulse stream of a time length 2 x ti The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration E Block s input x Block s physical output ust p x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output This table describes the different operating phases of the Burst function block Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input E e oscillation of output x for ni periods of time input x Aux changes to 1 2 When number of periods ni is reached output x Aux changes to 0 If output E changes to 0 be
325. uration The table below shows the block s different interfaces Name Meaning Illustration E Monostable input x Monostable s physical output E Bae mONO i pix x Aux Block s internal auxiliary output m ti Output x AUX This table describes the different operating phases of the retriggerable monostable Phase Description 1 On the rising edge of input E on delay time out ti is launched time base of 0 1ms outputs x and x Aux change to 1 When time out ti is over outputs x and x Aux change to 0 If a new rising edge for input E occurs before time out ti has elapsed outputs x and x Aux remain at 1 for a further time out ti The illustration below shows the trend diagram of the retriggerable monostable function block x Aux 35010512 07 2011 489 Installation of the discrete reflex module Reflex function block Monostable with time delay This function enables an action of a duration t2i to be launched with a t1i delay with the possibility of extending it for an identical duration The table below shows the block s different interfaces Meaning Illustration Monostable input F 7 Output Monostable s physical output _E Time delayedMONO Qupyt x Block s internal auxiliary output This table describes the different operati
326. ure 25 70 C Insulation resistance gt 10 MW below 500 VDC Dielectric strength on Sub D compliant with IEC1131 500 V actual 50 60 Hz 1 min Operating altitude 0 2000 m Degree of protection Terminals Unit IP20 compliant with IP IEC 529 Place of installation IP54 Maximum capacity of screw terminal blocks 2x 1mm wires with termination Standards The following table shows the European and international standards the TSX PAY 262 module meets PLC specific recommendations EN61131 2 IEC 1131 2 CSA 22 2 No 142 UL508 Electrical qualities UL746L UL94 Electrical equipment of machinery EN60204 1 IEC204 1 Emergency stop equipment EN418 Machine safety Related control EN954 1 PR EN954 2 system parts EN953 EN1088 DIN VDE 0110 DIN VDE 0660 EN60947 5 1 VDE 57100 NF C63 850 IEC 664 35010512 07 2011 393 Implementing safety modules 32 8 TSX PAY 282 module Overview This section describes the characteristics of the TSX PAY 282 module What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TSX PAY 282 module 395 Characteristics of the TSX PAY 282 module 396 394 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Presentation of the TSX PAY 282 module Introduction TSX PAY 282 module The TSX PAY 282 module is an I O safety module developed to comply with the
327. ut LEDs The 24 VDC modules are e TSX DEY 16D2 e TSX DEY 32D2K e TSX DEY 64D2K The 48 VDC modules are e TSX DEY 16D3 e TSX DEY 32D3K 62 35010512 07 2011 Discrete fault processing 1 0 LED Behavior After Power Outage Depending of the Supply Monitoring see page 404 check box in the discrete module configuration screen the I O LED behavior of the module after a power outage is different e When the Supply Monitoring check box is checked All inputs within a 16 channels group are forced to 0 by the CPU As a result the I O default is transmitted and the I O LED flashes e When the Supply Monitoring check box is unchecked All inputs within a 16 channels group are the last state available at the power outage occurrence As a result the I O default is not transmitted and the I O LED is switched off In both cases the inputs state is the last state before the sensor terminal voltage disappears 35010512 07 2011 63 Discrete fault processing Checking the Discrete Input Output connection At a Glance In order to check the Discrete I O connection ensure that e sensor data is registered by the corresponding inputs and the processor e control orders from the processor are registered by the outputs and transmitted to the corresponding pre actuators A WARNING UNEXPECTED SYSTEM BEHAVIOR Active outputs can activate machine movements Turn all power off before checking the Discrete I O conne
328. ut Output Modules Software Implementation In This Chapter This part describes the Discrete application specific function for Premium controllers and describes its implementation with the Unity Pro software What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 33 General Information about the Discrete Application Specific 401 Function 34 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application 403 35 Description of the Discrete Specific Application Language 421 Objects 36 Debugging of discrete modules 449 37 Diagnostic of discrete modules 459 38 Installation of the discrete reflex module 463 35010512 07 2011 399 Discrete Application 400 35010512 07 2011 General Information about the Discrete Application Specific Function 33 Installation Phase Overview Introduction The software installation of the application specific modules is carried out from the various Unity Pro editors e in offline mode e in online mode If you do not have a processor to connect to Unity Pro allows you to carry out an initial test using the simulator In this case the installation see page 402 is different The following order of installation phases is recommended but it is possible to change the order of certain phases for example starting with the configuration phase Installation Phases with Processor The following table shows the var
329. ution of a common per group of 8 channels Illustration Description of the connection terminal blocks 24VDC OvDC PEG ae AAN ABE7 R16T231 16 Relay Outputs u a g u amp y g a a ao a a2 a3 Qld a5 da fa fa tarara ra ralla rari rira rih rhi SSRSSsSSsssseSssss VSS gS SERES SiL o 35010512 07 2011 317 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os Illustration Output connection functions Supply for ABE 7 base and Type and rating of fuse originally fitted to the base I TSX module outputs 1 A fast blow J i voc voc ABE 7R16123 fi 300 100 394 101 307 107 1 2 a 3151 5 6 Mf gt o 3 4 l o o o Fu Fu 4 gt if 4 gt Actuator z Te E z 24 240 VCA or z 3 E 5 127 VDC z ta suppl ies el O O PP O O Fu Fuse rating according to the load NOTE Protection of relay contacts e a protection circuit must be mounted onto the terminals of each actuator e RC or MOV circuit in the case of alternating current e discharge diode for direct current 318 35010512 07 2011 TELEFAST 2 for Discrete I Os 31 25 TELEFAST 2 ABE 7P16T214 connection base Actuator connections on ABE 7P16T214 electromechanical or static output relay bases size 10 mm
330. ve measures in order to make it possible to control the following e galvanic insulated inputs at low energy level and requiring zero leakage current e power circuits whilst eliminating inductive over voltages at the source It is therefore obligatory to mount the following on the pre actuator coil terminals e an RC circuit or a MOV ZNO peak limiter for use with alternating current e adischarge diode for use with direct current NOTE a relay output that has been used with an alternating current load must not be then used with direct current and vice versa 35010512 07 2011 175 TSX DSY 08R5 Characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R5 module At a Glance This section provides a description of the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R5 module General characteristics The following table shows the general characteristics of the TSX DSY 08R5 module The TSX DSY 08R5 module 3 A thermal current relay outputs Threshold service voltage Direct 10 34 VDC see page 77 Alternating 19 264 VAC Thermal current 3A Maximum current per common 3 A value not to be exceeded Alternating current load Resistive Voltage 24V 48 V 100 120 V 200 240 V AGI2 Power 50VA 5 50VA 6 110VA 6 220 VA 6 110 VA 4 220 VA 4 Inductive Voltage 24V 48 V 100 120 V 200 240 V a Power 24VA 4 10VA 10 10VA 11 10 VA 11 19 24 VA 8 50VA 7 50 VA 9 110
331. wn menu of the General parameters zone Result A drop down list appears Fallback mode Fallback ie Maintenance Fallback Select the desired fallback mode For Fallback mode configure each channel of the selected group To do this click on the drop down menu arrow of the channel to be configured located in the Fall Back Value column Click on the desired value 0 or 1 6 Confirm the modification with the Edit Validate menu command 418 35010512 07 2011 Configuration of the Discrete Specific Application How to modify the Output Reactivation Parameter of a Discrete Module At a Glance This parameter defines the reactivation mode of disconnected outputs Possible modes are Mode Meaning Programmed Reactivation is executed with a command from the PLC application or through the appropriate debug screen Note In order to avoid repeated reactivations the module ensures automatically a 10 s delay between two reactivations Automatic The reactivation is executed automatically every 10 s until the error disappears The reactivation mode is defined for 8 channel groups NOTE The modification of this parameter is possible in online mode function available for Unity Pro versions greater than 1 0 Procedure The following table shows the procedure for defining the module output channel reactivation mode Step Action 1 Open the desired mod
332. ximum 60 mA Dissipated power 5 2 4 W 0 85 x Nb W 35010512 07 2011 169 TSX DSY 16T3 Dielectric strength Output ground or Output internal logic 1500 V actual 50 60 Hz for 1 min Insulation resistance gt 10 MOhms below 500 VDC Temperature downgrading see page 77 The characteristics at 60 C are guaranteed for 60 of max module current Legend 1 For U 330 Vor 34 V 2 All the outputs are equipped with fast electromagnet demagnetization circuits Electromagnet discharge time lt L R 3 Fit a fuse to the 48 V pre actuator supply 4 Excluding load current 5 Nb number of outputs at 1 170 35010512 07 2011 TSX DSY 16T3 Connecting the TSX DSY 16T3 module At a Glance The TSX DSY 16T3 module comprises 16 x 48 VDC protected transistor output channels This module is equipped with a removable 20 post screwed connection terminal block allowing outputs to be connected Circuit Diagram The circuit diagram for an output is shown below Ir Current Tandi ll PU Monitoring Transil i i i i l I i i i i I I l f i i H Control Q 0 n Pre actuator l I i I i Voltage Solid state i Monitoring switch Module Output 35010512 07 2011 171 TSX DSY 16T3 Module connection
333. y new start up An additional external condition managed by the API may be inserted into the feedback loop to inhibit any reactivation in the event of a safety system fault being detected 352 35010512 07 2011 Implementing safety modules Functional diagrams Introduction This section provides the functional diagrams for the emergency stop functions and the protective cover with automatic start up Emergency stop function The following diagram shows the functional diagram for the emergency stop function Supply Run Emergency stop Emergency stop voltage not activated activated channel input S121 to S232 channel input S01 to 112 Feedback loop Vive Te Start button 33 S34 C surveillance Output 13 14 C pae A E j OS Output 23 24 C lt 10 ms Jf Closed Open gt C on closing Depending on the wiring of Y3 Y4 reactivation is carried out on edge or on state A single open ES PB contact opens the safety outputs Both channels must be open to allow reactivation to take place this constitutes self checking of inputs Reactivation is only possible if the Y1 Y2 loop is closed this constitutes self checking of outputs 35010512 07 2011 353 Implementing safety modules Protective cover function with automatic start up The following diagram shows the functional diagram for the protective cover function with automatic start up
334. y applications Restart control via auxiliary input action reactivation input Possibility of monitoring the reactivation input by action on falling edge Start up mode selection using external cabling manual automatic or on falling edge Automatic output check by monitoring their status reading in the feedback loop Automatic input channel check by constant comparison of their respective statuses Full safety system diagnostics via e monitoring the ES PB or PS input status readings e monitoring the reactivation input reading e monitoring the feedback loop reading e monitoring the safety output control reading e monitoring the safety system power supply status reading e monitoring the external module supply Possibility to choose whether external supply is monitored or not 35010512 07 2011 349 Implementing safety modules Operating modes Introduction The safety function is autonomous in relation to PLC operation It does not follow the PLC operating modes It is able to shut off power even when the PLC is off in Stop mode or if the CPU is missing It is not a safety PLC The only exchange between the CPU and the module is diagnostic information transferred from the module to the CPU The PLC is constantly informed of the status of the safety system via input data Nevertheless the PLC has no control over any output Diagram The product diagram is shown below 121 _ Double a x

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

PLC_3_HW_IO_Discrete..

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents